A163/A251/A252

B047/B048
SERVICE MANUAL
001317MIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ®

A163/A251/A252/B047/B048
SERVICE MANUAL

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 A163
SERVICE MANUAL

001317MIU

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this
document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh
Corporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,
used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their
respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for
the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web
site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property. or loss of warranty
protection.

Ricoh Corporation

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER RICOH SAVIN
A163 N/A FW740 N/A
A251 N/A FW750 N/A
A252 N/A FW760 N/A
B047 A040 FW770 7700W
B048 A041 FW780 7800W

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* Original Printing
1 5/95 Revised Pages
2 5/96 Reprint
3 6/98 A251/A252 Addition
4 8/2001 B047/B048 Addition

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are supplied
with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.
7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turnig to
perform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanical
and electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium battery
which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only with an
identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM pack.
Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according to
local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not put
more than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 06/2004

Table of Contents
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. PAPER PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

3. DRUM PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

4. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

5. DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

6. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

1. DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2 DRUM DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2. CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

3. EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

3.2.1 Basic Operation (Manual Feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

3.2.2 Original Jam Check Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

3.2.3 Drive mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3.4.1 Manual ID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

4. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
4.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

4.3 CROSS-MIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

4.4.1 Toner Near End Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

SM i A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 06/2004
4.4.2 Recovery From Toner (Near) End condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

4.4.3 Toner Density Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

4.5.1 Basic Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

4.5.2 Manual Image Density Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

4.6 TONER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

5. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

5.3 PAPER SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

6. CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

6.2 COLLECTION OF USED TONER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

7. QUENCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

8. FUSING AND PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

8.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

8.2.1 Fusing Unit Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

8.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

8.3.1 Fusing Circuit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

8.3.2 Overheat Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

9. ROLL CUTTING RAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

INSTALLATION
1. ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.2 MACHINE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.3 POWER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

A163 ii SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 06/2004
1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

1.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

1.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

SERVICE TABLES
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

2. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

2.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

3. SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

4. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.2 JAM CODE TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

6. SERVICE REMARKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

6.1 DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

6.1.1 Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

6.2 CHARGE CORONA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

6.3 OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

6.4 DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

6.6 CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

6.7 FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

6.7A PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

SM iii A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 06/2004
6.8 ORIGINAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

6.9 PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

6.10 ROLL FEEDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

6.11 OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1. EXTERIOR COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1.1 Left Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.1.2 Left Lower Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.2.1 Right Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers . . 5-1

1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.3.1 Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

2. OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

3. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

4. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

A163 iv SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 06/2004
4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5. FUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

6. T & S CORONA UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . 5-34

6.2.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

7. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

8. COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

TROUBLESHOOTING
1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

SM v A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 06/2004
1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

1.6 PAPER CREASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

ROLL FEEDER
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . 7-2

3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

4. MECHANICAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

4.1 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

4.3 CUTTER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

5. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

5.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

A163 vi SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 06/2004
7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.1.1 Front Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.1.2 Left and Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . 7-19

7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: ± 3 mm (for length shorter than 420 mm)
± 5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

SM vii A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Rev. 11/2000
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Table top

Overall Machine
Information
Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system
Original Feed: Sheet feed

⇒ Original Skew
Tolerance:
2 mm/400mm

Original Size: Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise
Copy Size: Same as "Original Size"
Copying Speed: 3 cpm (A1/D sideways)
First Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways)
Warm-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)
Multi-Copy: 1 to 1 only
Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set
to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum
Drum Charge: Single-wire with grid wires (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio: 1 : 1 (±0.5%)
Exposure System: Slit exposure via fiber optic array
Exposure Lamp: Fluorescent lamp (26 W)
Development: Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410,
2 bags)
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption: 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)
Development Bias: Negative
Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection by induction
sensor
Image Density Adjustment: Development bias control + exposure control
Paper Separation: Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls
Cleaning: Cleaning blade

A163 1-1 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Paper Feeding: Manual feed (roll feeder optional)
Image Fusing: Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and silicone
rubber (lower) rollers
Fusing Lamp: Nichrome wire lamp
(115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W)
Self-diagnostic Codes: 11 codes, displayed in copy counter
Power Source: 115 V/60 Hz....15 A
220 V/50 Hz....7 A
230 V/50Hz.....7 A
240 V/50 Hz....7 A
Power Consumption: Maximum: 1.4 kW
Warm-up: 1.2 kW
Ready: 0.04 to 1.2 kW
Copy cycle: 1.3 kW
Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm
42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1"
Weight: 76 kg, 167.4 lb
Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration
Configuration
Additional equipment
Main frame Optional equipment
Roll feeder (A571) Table (A714)
A163 copier Roll cutting rail (A570) --
Side guides (A569) --

Other Optional Equipment

• Paper Spool
• Drum anti-condensation heater
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

SM 1-2 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. PAPER PATH

A: Original Path
B: Paper from the manual feed
C: Paper from the roller feed
D: Paper exit
E: Original Path from Rear Feeder

A163 1-3 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. DRUM PROCESSES

2
1
8

7
3

5 6

1. Charge
In the dark the charge corona unit applies a negative charge to the drum. The
grid plate ensures the charge is applied uniformly. The charge remains on the
surface of the drum because the photoconductive drum has a high electrical
resistance in the dark.
2. Exposure
High intensity light from a fluorescent lamp is reflected from the moving original
through the fiber optic array. The charge on the drum surface is dissipated in
direct proportion to the intensity of the reflected light, thus producing an electric
latent image on the drum surface.

SM 1-4 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Development
The magnetic developer brush on the development roller comes in contact with
the latent image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically
attracted to the negatively charged latent image areas.
4. Pre-Transfer Lamp
The pre-transfer lamp (PTL) illuminates the drum prior to image transfer. This
reduces the attraction between the toner and the drum, thus making image
transfer easier.
5. Image Transfer
Copy paper is fed to the drum surface, at the exact timing, to align the copy
paper and the developed image on the drum surface. Then a strong negative
charge is applied to the back side of the paper. The negative charge pulls the
toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper.
6. Paper Separation
A strong ac corona discharge is applied to the back side of the copy paper,
reducing the charge on the paper and breaking the electrostatic attraction
between the paper and the drum. Then, the stiffness of the copy paper causes it
to separate from the drum. The pick-off pawls help to separate paper which has
low stiffness.
7. Cleaning
The cleaning blade, which is angled against drum rotation (counter blade
system), removes any toner remaining on the drum surface.
8. Quenching
The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the surface of the drum.

A163 1-5 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

22 23 24 25 1 2 3
21

20
19 4
18
5
17
6
16
7
15
8
9

10

14 11

13
12

1. 1st Original Feed Roller 14. Roll Feeder

2. 1st Press Rollers 15. Paper Registration Rollers
3. Copy Tray 16. Development Unit
4. Exit Rollers 17. Toner Cartridge
5. Fusing Exit Rollers 18. Manual Feed Table
6. Hot Roller 19. Charge Corona Unit
7. Pressure Roller 20. 2nd Original Feed Roller
8. Gas Spring 21. Original Table
9. OPC Drum 22. 2nd Press Rollers
10. T/S Corona Unit 23. Exposure Lamp
11. Main Drive Unit 24. Fiber Optic Array
12. Table 25. Cleaning Blade
13. Paper Spool

SM 1-6 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
5. DRIVE LAYOUT

11 12 13 15 16 1 2 3
14

10

9 8 7

1. Original Feed Roller Pulley 9. Fusing Drive Chain

2. Original Feed Roller One Way Pulley 10. Exit Unit Drive Belt
3. Development Unit 11. Hot Roller Drive Gear
4. Development Unit Relay Gear 12. Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear
5. Development Drive Chain 13. Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear
6. Paper Registration Roller Clutch 14. Drum Drive Gear
7. Drum Drive Relay Gear 15. Original Feed Drive Pulley
8. Main Motor 16. Original Feed Drive Belt

A163 1-7 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point
(Water proof paper) index numbers.

Name Function Index. No.

Motors
Main Drives all mechanical components except the
32
fans. (DC Motor)
Exhaust Fan Removes the ozone built up around the drum
5
section to the ozone filter. (DC Motor)

Magnetic Clutches
Registration Drives the registration rollers. 30
Toner Supply Turns on to supply toner to the development unit. 31

Solenoids
Pick-off Pawl Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum. 6

Switches
Main Supplies power to the copier. 17
Original & Paper Cuts ac power when the original or paper feed
18
Feed Safety unit is opened.
Fusing Exit Cuts ac power when the fusing exit unit is
12
Safety opened.

Sensors
Door Open Indicates "Door Open" in the operation panel
29
and prohibits the key operation.
Toner Density Detects the density of toner in the developer. 26
Original Detects when the original lead edge passes at
4
Registration the front of the exposure glass.
Light Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp
27
output.
Entrance Feed Detects when copy paper is inserted (jam
24
detector).
Registration Detects when copy paper arrives at the
25
registration rollers (jam detector).
Exit Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. 7

Printed Circuit Boards

SM 1-8 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Name Function Index. No.
Main Controls all copier functions both directly and
22
through other PCBs.
PSU Converts the ac voltage to dc voltage. 21
AC Drive Provides ac power to the fusing lamp and PSU. 15
FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. 23
Operation Panel Control the operation panel display. 10

Lamps
Exposure Provides light to reflect the original’s image onto
2
the drum (fluorescent lamp).
Fusing Provides heat to the fusing unit. 3
Pre-Transfer Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to
20
(PTL) image transfer.
Quenching (QL) Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum
1
surface after cleaning.

Power Packs
Charge/Bias/Grid Provides high voltage power for the charge
19
Power Pack corona, charge grid, and development bias.
Transfer/ Provides high voltage power for the transfer
16
Separation corona and separation.

Thermistors
Hot Roller Monitors the hot roller’s surface temperature. 8
Pressure Roller Monitors the pressure roller’s surface
11
temperature.

Thermofuses
Fusing Protects against fusing overheat. 9

Heaters
Anticondensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier
13
(option).
Others
Total Counter Keeps track of the total length of copies made
28
(Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.).
Circuit Breaker Guards against voltage surges in the input
(Europe, Asia)/ power. 14
Fuse (U.S.A.)

A163 1-9 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SM 1-10 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DETAILED SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. DRUM
1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum has the following characteristics:

• It is able to accept a high negative electrical charge in the dark. (The electrical
resistance of the OPC drum is high in the absence of light.)
• The electric charge on the drum surface dissipates when the drum is exposed
to light. (The conductivity of the OPC drum is greatly enhanced by exposure
to light.)
• It dissipates an amount of charge that is in direct proportion to the intensity of
the light. That is, where stronger light is directed to the photoconductor
surface, a smaller voltage remains.
The OPC drum used in this model has high sensitivity, good color reproduction,
and good reproduction of low contrast originals (pencil originals, etc.)

A163 2-1 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.2 DRUM DRIVE

[I]
[A]
[H] [G]

[D] [F]

[E]
[B]

[C]

The OPC drum [A] is 80 millimeters in diameter and 970 millimeters long. It turns
constantly when the main motor [B] is on.
When the main motor turns on, the drive is transmitted to the drum in the
following way:
main motor drive gear [C] ⇒ idle gears [D] ⇒ drum drive gear [E] ⇒
drum flange [F] ⇒ drum
When the drum knob is tightened, the right flange presses firmly against the drum
so that the drum is held tightly between the flanges. The drum and flanges turn
together when the main motor is on. At this time, the drive is also transmitted to
the original feed rollers [G] through the original feed drive pulley [H] and belt [I].

SM 2-2 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. CHARGE
2.1 OVERVIEW

[A]

[B]

Charge
Charge/
Grid
Power
Pack Grid

This model uses a single wire corona unit [A] to charge the OPC (organic
photoconductor) drum [B]. The corona unit generates a corona of negative ions
when a high negative voltage is applied to it by the charge/grid power pack.
To make the negative corona uniform, a grid consisting of 8 wires is installed on
the charge corona unit between the corona wire and the drum. This grid drains
off any charge in excess of --860 volts, thus preventing fluctuation of the charge
potential.

A163 2-3 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT

Charge/Bias/Grid PP CN243 PSU

CN340-1 -3
24V Va
CN340-2
CN243-8 GND
CN106 Main Board
DC/DC CN340-3 -A8
0/5
Converter
Charge

CN106
CN340-4 -A9 Grid Drive
0/5
DC/DC
CN340-6 -A10 Grid Detect
Converter

The PSU supplies +24 volts (VAA) to the charge/bias/grid power pack as the
power supply source. Approximately 2 seconds after the copy process starts, the
CPU drops CN106-A8 from 5 volts to 0 volts. This actuates the dc/dc converter
within the power pack which applies a high negative voltage of approximately
--5.0 kV to the charge corona wire. The corona wire then generates a negative
corona charge.
The grid limits the maximum corona charge to --860 volts. This ensures that the
charge does not fluctuate and an even charge is applied to the drum surface.
The copy grid voltage and charge voltage amounts can be adjusted using SP #
--11 and SP #--10 respectively.
The grid drive signal applied to CN340-4 is a pulse width modulated signal. As
the width of the pulses applied increases, the strength of the grid charge also
increases. The main board monitors the grid charge at CN106-A10 and controls
the width of the drive pulses based on this feedback.

SM 2-4 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION

[A]

If ozone produced by the corona charge stays in the charge corona area, it may
cause uneven corona charging to the drum. To prevent this, ozone is vacuumed
out through the exhaust fan [A], and changed to oxygen by the ozone filter before
being blown out of the copier.

A163 2-5 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. EXPOSURE
3.1 OVERVIEW

[F] [D] [H]

[E]

[G]

[I] [B]

[A] [C]

Light from the exposure lamp [A] reflects off the original and through the fiber
optics [B] to the OPC drum [C]. During exposure, the original moves across the
exposure glass at the same speed as the drum’s peripheral velocity.
The platen plate [D] presses the original [E] flat against the exposure glass [F]
just above the fiber optic array. This ensures that the image is properly focused.
(The original must be within 0.2 mm of the exposure glass surface.)
The exposure lamp is a 140 V, 26 W fluorescent lamp.
The original registration sensor [G] detects when the original leading edge passes
the front of the exposure glass. The original flattener [H] holds the leading edge of
the original to ensure that original registration sensor detects the original at the
correct time. The light sensor [I] monitors the intensity of the exposure lamp
output.

SM 2-6 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED

3.2.1 Basic Operation (Manual Feed)

[A]
[B]

[C]

When the entrance sensor [A] of the manual feed table detects the leading edge
of the copy paper, the main motor starts rotating and the drum process (exposure
lamp, change corona,... etc.) begins. The registration clutch is activated at the
appropriate timing after the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the
copy paper. The copy paper is fed past reg roller registration roller [C] and stops
to wait for the original. "Set Paper", "RF Select" turns off and "Set Original" is
indicated on the operation panel.

A163 2-7 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [B] [D]

[A]

[C]

[F] [G] [E]

The original feed rollers rotate with the rotation of the main motor. The original is
pulled by the 1st original feed roller [A] just after the original is placed on the
original feed table. The original registration sensor [C] detects the leading edge
of the original, and the "Set Original" indicator turns off. At the appropriate time,
the copy paper starts to be fed again. The original passes between the platen
plate [D] and exposure glass [E] and from there to the 2nd original feed roller [F].
The original’s image is reflected through the fiber optics array [G] to the drum as
the original passes between the platen plate and exposure glass. Then, the
original exits the machine. At the appropriate time after either the original or copy
paper exits, the image creation process (drum process) stops. When both the
original and copy paper have exited the machine, the mechanical drive (main
motor) stops.

SM 2-8 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.2.2 Original Jam Check Timing

[A]

There is only one sensor (original registration sensor) in the original path.
Therefore, original jam cannot be detected during the time that a maximum
original length (2m) passes this sensor. The original jam check is done after the
leading edge of the original has moved 2.5 m (around 50 seconds). To stop the
machine during operation and to protect originals if something wrong happens to
them, the Emergency Stop key [A] should be pressed.

A163 2-9 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.2.3 Drive Mechanism

[D]

[A]

[B]

[C]

The original feed rollers are driven through the original feed drive pulley and belt
by the main motor as mentioned in the drum drive section.
The paper registration rollers [A] are rotated by the main motor [B] through the
gears [C] and the paper registration clutch [D].

SM 2-10 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL

[D] Main Board

[A]
[B] [C] Light Sensor

The FL regulator [A] receives 24 volts dc at CN401-1 from the PSU [B]. The
control signal, which is a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal, is received at
CN1-3. The PWM signal has a period (T) of 1 millisecond and a duty ratio of 15%
to 100%.
The basic light intensity level is determined by the image density selected at the
operation panel (manual ID control). The CPU uses the light sensor to monitor
the actual light intensity. The light sensor [C] directly detects the lamp’s light
output and feeds a light intensity signal back to CN104-B1 of the main board [D].
This feedback allows the CPU to compensate for variations in light intensity due
to the lamp’s age or temperature.

A163 2-11 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL
Light Sensor Light Sensor
Manual ID Level Manual ID Level
Output [V] Output [V]
1 0.78 8 1.53
2 0.892 9 1.73
3 0.899 10 1.93
4 0.938 11 2.13
5 1.02 12 2.33
6 1.24 13 2.52
7 1.45 14 2.72

3.4.1 Manual ID Control

The user can select one of 14 manual ID levels. For each level, the intensity of
the light output by the exposure lamp (as measured by the light sensor) varies.
This is shown in the above table. The development roller bias also varies. (See
the section on development bias.)

SM 2-12 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
4. DEVELOPMENT
4.1 OVERVIEW

[D] [C] [B]

[A]

When the main motor turns on, the paddle roller [A] and development roller [B]
start turning. The paddle roller picks up developer in its paddles and transports it
to the development roller. Internal magnets in the development roller attract the
developer to the development roller sleeve.
The turning sleeve of the development roller then carries the developer past the
doctor blade [C]. The doctor blade trims the developer to the desired thickness
and creates backspill to the cross-mixing mechanism.
The development roller continues to turn, carrying the developer to the OPC
drum. When the developer brush contacts the drum surface, the negatively
charged areas of the drum surface attract and hold the positively charged toner.
In this way, the latent image is developed.
Negative bias is applied to the development roller to prevent toner from being
attracted to non-image areas on the drum that may have residual negative
charge. The bias also controls image density.
After turning about 100 degrees more, the development roller releases the
developer into the developer tank. The developer is agitated by the paddle roller
and the cross-mixing mechanism.
Also, in this machine, rotation of the paddle roller and development roller tend to
cause the air pressure inside the unit to become higher than the air pressure
around the development unit. Therefore, a hole fitted with a filter has been added
to the top of the unit to relieve air pressure and to minimize toner scattering.
The toner density sensor [D] is mounted on the upper side of the development
unit to detect the density of toner in the developer.

A163 2-13 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

[D]
[C]

[B]

[A]
[H] [G]
[F]

[I]
[E]

When the main motor [A] is on, the paddle roller [B], development roller [C], and
mixing auger [D] in the development unit are driven through the development
drive chain [E] and gears [F].
The toner agitator shaft [G] is rotated through the gears [H] by the toner supply
clutch [I] engaged in the toner supply condition.

SM 2-14 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.3 CROSS-MIXING

[C]
[B]

[F]

[A]

[E]

[D]

"Cross-mixing" keeps the developer’s toner and carrier evenly mixed and evenly
distributes the developer within the development unit. Cross-mixing also agitates
the developer to generate the necessary triboelectric charge on the toner and
carrier particles.
The arrows in the above illustration show the developer movement directions
within the machine. The developer that is attracted to the development roller [A]
is split into two parts by the doctor blade [B]. One part (the magnetic brush) goes
on to develop the latent image on the drum. However, the other part is trimmed
off by the doctor blade and directed to the backspill plate [C].
As the developer slides down the backspill plate to the paddle roller [D], part of
the developer falls into the auger inlet [E] and is transported to the left side of the
unit by the mixing auger [F], where it drops onto the paddle roller. The amount of
developer moved to the right by the backspill plate is equal to the amount moved
to the left by the mixing auger.

A163 2-15 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
The toner supply amount ratio is determined by the following conditions.

TS 0 ~ 50 sheets 51 ~ 100 101 ~ 150 151 ~ 200 201 ~ 250 251 sheets ~
Level (~ 30 m) sheets sheets sheets sheets (150 m ~)
(30 ~ 60 m) (60 ~ 90 m) (90 ~ 120 m) (120 ~ 150 m)
0 VTS < 4.25 VTS < 4.00 VTS < 3.50 VTS < 3.00 VTS < 2.50 VTS < 2.0
1 4.25 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.50 ≤ VTS < 2.00 ≤ VTS <
4.30 4.10 3.80 3.50 3.00 2.40
2 4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.10 ≤ VTS < 3.80 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.40≤ VTS <
N 4.35 4.20 4.10 4.00 3.50 2.80
3 4.35 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.10 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 2.80 ≤ VTS <
4.40 4.30 4.20 4.20 4.00 3.20
4 4.40 ≤ VTS < 4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.20 ≤ VTS <
4.45 4.40 4.35 4.30 4.25 3.60
5 4.45 ≤ VTS 4.40 ≤ VTS 4.35 ≤ VTS 4.30 ≤ VTS 4.25 ≤ VTS 3.60 ≤ VTS
0 VTS < 4.35 VTS < 4.30 VTS < 4.25 VTS < 3.75 VTS < 3.25 VTS < 2.75
1 4.35 ≤ VTS < 4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.25 ≤ VTS < 3.75 ≤ VTS < 3.25 ≤ VTS < 2.75 ≤ VTS
4.38 4.33 4.30 4.00 3.50 <3.20

2 4.38 ≤ VTS < 4.33 ≤ VTS < 4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.20 ≤ VTS <
L 4.40 4.36 4.33 4.10 3.80 3.60
3 4.40 ≤ VTS < 4.36 ≤ VTS < 4.33 ≤ VTS < 4.10 ≤ VTS < 3.80 ≤ VTS < 3.60 ≤ VTS <
4.42 4.40 4.36 4.20 4.00 3.90
4 4.42 ≤ VTS < 4.40 ≤ VTS < 4.36 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.90 ≤ VTS <
4.45 4.43 4.40 4.38 4.35 4.30
5 4.45 ≤ VTS 4.43 ≤ VTS 4.40 ≤ VTS 4.38 ≤ VTS 4.35 ≤ VTS 4.30 ≤ VTS
0 VTS < 4.00 VTS < 3.50 VTS < 3.00 VTS < 2.50 VTS < 2.00 VTS < 1.50
1 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.50 ≤ VTS < 2.00≤ VTS < 1.50 ≤ VTS <
4.10 3.80 3.50 3.00 2.40 2.00
2 4.10 ≤ VTS < 3.80 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.40 ≤ VTS < 2.00 ≤ VTS <
H 4.20 4.10 4.00 3.50 2.80 2.50
3 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.10 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50≤ VTS < 2.80 ≤ VTS < 2.50 ≤ VTS <
4.30 4.20 4.20 4.00 3.20 3.00
4 4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.20 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS <
4.40 4.35 4.30 4.25 3.60 3.50
5 4.40 ≤ VTS 4.35 ≤ VTS 4.30 ≤ VTS 4.25 ≤ VTS 3.60 ≤ VTS 3.50≤ VTS

TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio)

0: No supply 1: 7.5% 2: 15% 3: 30% 4: 50% 5: 100%

The toner density sensor is used for toner density control. It measures the ratio of
toner to carrier in the developer.
Toner is supplied every 600 mm when the toner density sensor value (VTS)
meets one of the TS level conditions from 1 to 5. The triboelectric charge
generated on the toner and carrier become greater in accordance with the copy
quantity and is stabilized after 250 copies. To compensate the triboelectric
charge characteristic, the value of the toner supply control changes as shown.
During the initial conditioning, the main motor rotates the development unit to
stabilize the triboelectric charge generated on the toner and carrier and the toner
density sensor is automatically adjusted to 4.0±0.1V using new developer. The
initial conditioning (SP36) must be performed whenever the developer is replaced.

SM 2-16 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.4.1 Toner Near End Condition
When TS level 5 is detected 3 times in a row, the toner near end condition is
detected and the add toner indicator starts flashing. When in the toner near end
condition, 16 more meters (A1/D size: 27 copies) can be copied. Then the add
toner indicator will light and the machine will not operate.

4.4.2 Recovery From Toner (Near) End Condition

After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), the
main motor rotates the development unit for 1 minute. For 30 seconds during this
period, toner is supplied at 100% of the supply amount. Then, copies can be
made. After new toner is installed, the toner density sensor value may fluctuate
until 30 meters of copying has been done. This may cause the toner end
detection to malfunction even when the new toner cartridge has been installed
correctly. Because of this, toner (near) end is not detected until 30 meters (A1/D
size: 50 copies) after replacing toner cartridge.
The same action as described above will also take place after opening and
closing original feed unit, or turning the main switch off and on, or unplugging and
plugging power cord. This is known as "fake recovery".

A163 2-17 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
4.4.3 Toner Density Sensor

Toner Density Sensor Main Board

2 CN104-A11 [12V]
1 CN104-B20
Control TS Control
Circuit 3 CN104-A10 TS. FB
4 CN104-B21
GND

Coils

The toner density sensor circuit controls the amount of toner in the developer
mixture.
The toner density sensor is powered by 12 volts from CN104-A11 of the main
board. (The potential of CN104-A11 is 24 V when the connector is disconnected.)
The sensor’s sensitivity is based on the feedback signal applied from
CN104-A10. The input signal to the sensor passes from the main board at
CN104-B20.
The active sensor element is a very small transformer with three coils. When iron
ferrite (carrier) is near the sensor element, the inductance of the coils changes,
causing the current through the transformer to change. As the amount of toner in
the developer increases, the effect of the carrier particles decreases and the
voltage applied to CN104-A10 decreases. Conversely, when the toner
concentration drops as toner is used up, the effect of the carrier on the sensor
coils increases and the voltage at CN104-A10 increases.

SM 2-18 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

4.5.1 Basic Concept

When the drum is exposed, most of the negative charge is eliminated from the
areas where light strikes the drum. This leaves a negative charge pattern
corresponding to the dark areas of the original. After exposure, however, a small
residual charge of about --100 volts (for white paper) remains in the exposed
areas. This residual charge could attract positively charged toner from the
development roller, resulting in dirty background on the copy.
The development bias prevents dirty background. A negative bias that is a little
larger than the residual charge is applied to the development roller. This prevents
the positively charged toner from being attracted to the background areas of the
latent image.

Bias Manual ID Bias

(Volts)

Manual ID Setting

4.5.2 Manual Image Density Bias

The development bias is applied as shown by the above chart.
In addition to the development bias, the image density is also controlled by
varying the exposure light intensity. (See the exposure section.)

A163 2-19 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.6 TONER SUPPLY

[C]

[B]
[A]

[B]

To allow a compact design, the toner supply mechanism is built into the toner
cartridge. An agitator [A] in the toner cartridge turns when the toner supply clutch
is engaged. As the agitator rotates, mylar strips [B] on the ends of the agitator
force toner through small holes (0.5 mm in diameter) in a plastic strip [C] along
one side of the toner cartridge. The toner particles thus ejected from the cartridge
fall into the development unit and are mixed into the developer. The toner agitator
turns at 75 rpm and the toner supply rate is approximately 22.5 grams per minute.

SM 2-20 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
5. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

[B] [A] [C] [D] [E]

5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL)

After the latent image is developed but before the image is transferred to the
copy paper, the drum surface is illuminated by the pre-transfer lamp [A]. This
illumination reduces the negative potential on the drum surface. This prevents
toner particles from being re-attracted to the negatively charged drum during the
paper separation process. It also makes image transfer and paper separation
easier.

5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER

The registration rollers [B] feed the copy paper through the transfer entrance
guides to the transfer section. A high negative voltage (about --5.0 kV) is applied
to the transfer corona wire [C], and the corona wire generates negative ions.
These negative ions are applied to the copy paper, and the negative charge
attracts the positively charged toner away from the drum and onto the paper. In
addition, the paper is held against the drum by the positive counter charge on the
drum.

5.3 PAPER SEPARATION

After image transfer, the copy must be separated from the drum. To break the
attraction between the paper and the drum, the separation corona wires [D] apply
an ac corona (5.0 kV) to the reverse side of the paper. The stiffness and weight
of the paper cause it to separate from the drum.
The separation corona has a negative component of approximately --250 volts. This
negative component holds the toner on the paper to prevent it from scattering the drum
during paper separation. The two pick-off pawls [E] ensure that thin paper, paper with
low stiffness, or upward curled paper separates completely from the drum.

A163 2-21 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM

[A] [B]

[D]

[C]

The pick-off pawl solenoid [A] is energized after the registration clutch turns on to
feed the copy paper to the drum. The pick-off shaft [B] then rotates clockwise and
the pick-off pawls [C] touch the drum surface.
Just after the leading edge of the copy paper passes the pick-off pawls, the
pick-off solenoid turns off again. The pick-off spring [D] then rotates the pick-off
shaft counterclockwise and moves the pick-off pawls away from the drum.

SM 2-22 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT Rev. 5/95

The T/S power pack is powered by +24 volts (Va) from the PSU. The dc/dc
converters and dc/ac inverter change the +24 volts supply into the high voltages
used by the transfer and separation coronas.
The main board turns on the transfer corona using PWM signal (T.Drive). This
turns on the dc/dc converter, which applies a high voltage of approximately --5.0
kV to the transfer corona wire. The main board turns on the separation corona
using PWM signals (S.AC Drive and S.DC Drive). The dc/dc converter and dc/ac
inverter circuits then apply approximately 5.0 kV ac and --200 V dc to the
separation corona wires.
A larger transfer current is applied when the fusing unit is in high or low
temperature mode than in normal temperature mode. In high or low mode, thin
copying paper (translucent paper or film) may be wrapped around the drum. This
may cause the paper to be jammed or transported incorrectly. To correct for this,
the separation current is increased in high and low modes. To ensure good copy
quality in high mode, the PTL (pre-transfer lamp) is off during the copy process.
A larger separation current is applied at the leading edge of the paper to improve
the separation in high temperature mode.
When roll feeder is installed, a larger transfer current is applied at the trailing
edge of the paper to improve transfer at the curled trailing.

A163 2-23 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. CLEANING
6.1 OVERVIEW

[A]
[C]

[B]

This copier uses the counter blade system for drum cleaning. The blade [A] is
angled against the drum rotation. This counter blade system has the advantage
of high cleaning efficiency.
The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum after the image is
transferred to the copy paper. The toner that is wiped off by the cleaning blade
drops onto the toner collection coil [B], which then moves it to the toner collection
bottle.
The cleaning blade pressure spring [C] applies pressure to the exact center of
the cleaning blade so that pressure is evenly applied across the entire length of
the cleaning blade. Blade pressure is applied constantly.

SM 2-24 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6.2 COLLECTION OF USED TONER

[A]
[D]

[C]

[C]
[B]

The toner collection coil [A], which is rotated by the main motor [B] through the
gears [C], moves used toner from the cleaning unit to the toner collection bottle
[D]. The toner collection bottle capacity is enough to hold used toner from making
1220 m copies. The CPU uses the copy quantity to detect the used toner
overflow. The used toner overflow condition is detected when the copy length
counter (SP52) reaches the used toner detection threshold setting (SP51, Default
value: 1220m). When this condition occurs, "FULL" is indicated in the copy
counter and copying is disabled.
After disposing of the toner in the toner collection bottle and closing the paper
path section, pressing of the Clear Modes/Stand by key should be done by
customers themselves to clear the memory counter for the copy quantity. The
memory for the copy quantity can be cleared using SP53. SP52 shows the length
of copies made since the used toner was emptied. When "0" is input in SP53, the
value of SP52 is cleared.

A163 2-25 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
7. QUENCHING

[B]

[A]

After the drum [A] is cleaned by the cleaning blade, light from the quenching lamp
[B] neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum. The quenching lamp turns on
and off at the same time as the main motor.
The main board turns on the quenching lamp LEDs by dropping CN104-B26 to 0
volt.

SM 2-26 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8. FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
8.1 OVERVIEW

[F] [C]

[J]

[B] [H]

[I]

[G]
[D]
[A] [E]

After separation from the drum, copy paper rides on the transport plate [A]. The
small separation rollers [B] hold the paper against the transport plate so that the
back curled paper is straightened before it enters the fusing section.
Two rollers fuse the image to the copy paper by applying heat and pressure. The
hot roller [C] is made of carbon-teflon and the pressure roller [D] is made of
silicone rubber. Pressure is constantly applied by the pressure levers at the ends
of the fusing unit.
The fusing lamp [E], which is located at the hot roller axis, turns on and off to
maintain the operating temperature. The temperature control circuit on the main
board monitors the surface temperature of the hot roller and the pressure roller
through a thermistor [F and G respectively].
There are three operating temperature settings: normal, high, and low. The
normal setting has a choice of 7 temperature settings, adjustable by SP1 or key
operation. The high setting has a choice of 4 temperature settings. The low
setting also has a choice of 4 temperature settings.
The hot roller strippers [H] separate the copy from the hot roller and direct it to
the fusing exit rollers [I].
The thermofuse provides backup overheat protection. (See the section on fusing
temperature control.)
The fusing exit sensor [J] is used for jam detection.

A163 2-27 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

8.2.1 Fusing Unit Drive

[I] [J] [A]

[J] [C]

[B]
[H]
[G]

[D]

[F]

[E]

The hot roller [A] is turned by the hot roller drive gear [B] as shown. The pressure
roller [C] is friction driven by the hot roller. The fusing rollers turn constantly when
the main motor [D] is on, driven via the gear [E], through the fusing drive chain
[F], sprocket [G], and gear [H], to the hot roller drive gear.
The exit section is driven by the exit unit drive belt [I] through the hot roller drive
gear and gears [J].

SM 2-28 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
8.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

8.3.1 Fusing Circuit Operation

The fusing lamp is powered by the ac drive board and controlled by the main
board.
The ac drive board receives direct wall voltage ac power (not stepped down) at
T201 and T202. It also receives +24 volts at CN202-1. The ac power is applied to
the drive circuit, the fusing lamp, and the triac (TRC201). The dc power drives
PTC201 and RA201.
To turn on the fusing lamp, the main board drops CN106-B14 to LOW. This
activates the photocoupler (PTC201) which in turn energizes the drive circuit.
The drive circuit turns on the triac to complete the lamp circuit, thus turning on
the lamp.
RA201 guards against a failure of the +24 volt power supply. When +24 volts is
applied at CN202-1 and CN106-B15 drops to LOW, RA201 is energized and its
ac contacts stay open. If the +24 volts power from CN 106-A2 stops, the ac
contacts of RA201 close, stopping the drive circuit and turning off the fusing lamp.

A163 2-29 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.3.2 Overheat Protection
The overheat protection circuit on the main board turns off the fusing lamp if the
temperature goes too high.
The input from TH1 (Hot Roller Thermistor) goes to pin 3 of IC17 as well as to the
CPU. As the temperature of TH1 increases, its resistance decreases and
therefore the voltage at pin 3 of IC17 increases. If this voltage becomes greater
than the voltage at pin 2, the output at pin 1 becomes HIGH. Q1 then turns off
and cuts the +24 volt supply to ac drive board. The fusing lamp then turns off.
The overheat protection circuit becomes effective at about 215°C.
TF1 provides overheat protection in case a short bypasses the control and drive
circuits. This fuse will open if it reaches approximately 192°C.

SM 2-30 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Hot Roller
Temp. (°C)

Pressure Roller Temp. (°C)

Operating Temperature

Lower Limit

Lower Limit

The main board monitors the temperature of the hot roller through TH1 and the
temperature of the pressure roller through TH2. The CPU determines whether or
not to turn on the fusing lamp based on the combination of the input from these
two thermistors. If the pressure roller is cool, the CPU keeps the hot roller
temperature high. However, if the pressure roller is hot, the CPU decreases the
operating temperature of the hot roller. The above graph shows the relationship
between the temperatures of the hot and pressure rollers.

A163 2-31 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The operating temperature of the hot roller and pressure roller can be adjusted
using SP #--7 and SP #--8. These programs are used to compensate for
variations in the response of different thermistors. SP #--7 adjusts the hot roller
temperature and SP #--8 adjusts the pressure roller temperature. SP #--7 shift the
temperature in 1 degree increments (--9°C to +9°C). The fusing temperature can
be monitored using SP #--9.
- The ready condition -
When the hot roller temperature reaches the ready temperature, the copier
enters the ready condition, and copying is possible. The ready temperature is
anywhere that is 5° lower than the hot roller operating temperature in the
selected fusing unit mode.
- Fusing Unit Operating Modes -
There are three operating temperature modes, selected with the Copy Media key:
normal (for use with plain paper), high (for translucent paper), and low (for
translucent film).
The normal temperature mode can have one of 7 temperature settings (modes 1
to 7; see the diagram on the previous page); the setting is selected using SP#1
or by key operation. The high temperature mode can have one of 4 temperature
settings (mode 5 to 8); the setting is selected by SP#2 or by key operation. The
low temperature mode can also have one of 4 temperature settings (mode 2 to
5); the setting is selected using SP#3 or by key operation. In this way, the setting
of the fusing unit temperature modes can be adjusted to match the paper type
more exactly, either by a service technician using SP Modes, or by a key
operator.
The key operation sequence is as follows. The setting input by this procedure
does not overwrite the setting that is stored in the SP Mode.
First, select the temperature mode to be adjusted, using the Copy Media key.
Then hold the Copy Media key down for longer than 2 seconds; the Density
indicator inverts, and the unlit lamp on the indicator shows the current setting.

SM 2-32 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The position of the unlit lamp corresponds to the fusing temperature mode as
shown below.

(Normal)

Mode1 Mode 5 Mode 7

Mode 2 Mode 4 Mode 6
Mode 3

(High)

Mode 5
Mode 6 Mode 8
Mode 7

(Low)

Mode 2
Mode 3 Mode 5
Mode 4
Select the required setting with the Density keys, then press the Copy Media key
to store the setting. The Density indicator reverts to its normal operating mode,
but it is blinking if the setting just selected is not the same as that stored in the
SP Mode setting for the same temperature mode.
As can be seen on the diagrams on the previous page, modes 1 to 7 are similar
in principle. However, Mode 8 (the highest temperature mode) is a bit different.
The hot roller temperature is kept at 195°C and it starts to rotate to keep the
pressure roller temperature between 130°C and 145°C. When the hot roller or
pressure roller temperature is below the lower limit, copying is disabled.
After fusing, paper shrinks slightly, and expands again after a few minutes. The
shrinkage and expansion are different at different fusing unit temperatures.
Therefore, if the fusing unit operating mode settings have been changed, cutting
length adjustment of the roll feeder unit may be required.

A163 2-33 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION
When the copier is not in use, the energy saver function reduces the power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
When the Clear Modes/Stand-by key is hold down for over 2 seconds, the copier
goes into the energy saver mode. A message is displayed on copy counter and
all the other indicators turn off.

The fusing temperature is decreased by 15°C from one of the normal mode
settings for copying. The energy saving ratio is approximately 14%. The waiting
time until the copier returns to the ready condition is approximately 60 seconds.
NOTE: The above energy saving ratio is a standard value measured in
laboratory tests under controlled conditions. The actual ratio will vary
depending on environmental conditions, copy modes, power supply
conditions and measurement instruments.

Press the Clear Mode/Standby key. The copier is returned to the ready condition
after a warm-up time.
When the auto energy saver mode (SP #10) is selected, the copier automatically
goes to the energy saver mode at the auto reset time selected by SP #9.

SM 2-34 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT

[A]

Paper creasing may occur depending on the type of paper used. The fusing
entrance guide [A] height is changed by adjusting a lever (there are three
settings).

A163 2-35 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9. ROLL CUTTING RAIL
9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

The roll cutting rail cuts sheets of paper from the paper roll.
For inserting paper between the slide shafts [A] and cutter guide stay [B], the
holders [C] hold the slide shafts at the upper position by keeping the gap
constant. To stop paper dropping from the roll cutting rail, the holders hold the
slide shafts at the lower position by holding the paper against the cutter guide
stay.
The guide shaft [D], made of resin, protects the paper knife blade from damage
by metal parts of the unit.

SM 2-36 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF)
2. Humidity Range: 20% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 Lux (do not expose to
direct sunlight).
4. Ventilation: Minimum space 20 m3
Room air should turn over at least 30
m3/hr/person.
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.15 mg/m3
(4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)
6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as
follows:
a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from
low to high, or vice versa.

b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner
in the summer.

c) Where it will be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater

in the winter.

7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases.

8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.
9. Place the machine on a strong and level base.
10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strong
vibration.

SM 3-1 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Back
600 mm

Left Right
600 mm 600 mm

Front
1000 mm

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)

2. Back: 600 mm (24 in)
3. Right: 600 mm (24 in)
4. Left: 600 mm (24 in)

1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenter’s level.

A163 3-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.3 POWER SOURCE
1. Input Voltage Level: 115 V/60 Hz
More than 15 A (for U.S.A. version)

220 V/230 V/240 V/50 Hz

More than 7 A (for European version)
2. Permissible Voltage Fluctuation: ±10%

3. Do not set anything on the power cord.

NOTE: a) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

b) Avoid multi-wiring.

SM 3-3 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Copier
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Guide Wire ............................................................. 2 pcs
Copy Tray ............................................................... 1 pc
Copy Guide ............................................................ 1 pc

A163 3-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [D] [B]

[E] [E]

[C]

[A]

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is being
installed on the table.
2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the table
holes [E]).

Warning: The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier
too hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving
the copier, push the table.

SM 3-5 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]
[E]

3. Open the paper path section [A] and remove two strips of shipping tape [B].
4. Remove the right upper cover [C] (2 screws).
5. Remove the drum protection sheet [D], and remove the screw [E] to apply
cleaning blade pressure to the drum. Remove paper from transport section.
Close the paper path section.

A163 3-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
[A]

[E]

[C]
[B]

[D]

6. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover
[C]. Remove a sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the
developer [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown,
then close all doors.
7. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.

SM 3-7 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95

[D] [B]

[A]

[C]

[E]

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60°C when the main switch is
turned on, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary to
access the SP mode when loading the second Kg of developer (in
step 11).
Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer is
loaded from the development entrance.

8. Press the following keys on the operation panel:

Clear Mode key [A]
+ key [B]
+ key
Clear/Stop key [C]
9. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench and
toner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode).
10. Select 23 using the + key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. The main
motor will rotate.
11. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded
from the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into the
development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 Kg). Press the Clear
Modes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

A163 3-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
[C] [B]

[A]

[D]

[E] [F]

12. Press the following keys on the operation panel:

Clear key [A]
+ key [B]
--key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
13. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end
and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
14. Select 36 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys.
Function Select key [E]
+ key
RF Select key [F]
Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operating
mode from SP mode. (New developer initialization)

SM 3-9 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]

[B]

[C]

15. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown.

16. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until it
stops.

A163 3-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]

[C]
[B]

17. Attach the guide wires [A] to the copy tray [B].
18. Install the copy tray [B] and copy guide [C].
19. Reinstall all the covers.
20. Check the copy quality and copier operation.

SM 3-11 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Table
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Top Plate ................................................................ 1
Left Side Plate ........................................................ 1
Right Side Plate ..................................................... 1
Middle Plate ........................................................... 1
Rear Cover ............................................................. 1
Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8 .......................14

A163 3-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95

[E]

[D]

[H]

[C]

[A]
[G] [E]

[C]
[A]
[A]
A, B
[F] [A]

[D] [A]
[B]

NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces around
the screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two components
meet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of the
left plate.
1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws).
2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A.
3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each).
4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened.
5. Flip the table the correct way.

SM 3-13 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Roll Cutting Rail
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Cutter Guide ........................................................... 1 pc
Cutter Knife ............................................................ 1 pc
Roll Paper Arm ....................................................... 2 pcs
Roll Paper Shaft ..................................................... 1 pc
Roll Shaft Holder .................................................... 2 pcs
Roll Flange ............................................................. 2 pcs

[A]

[B]

[A]
[B]

1. Remove the small caps [A] from the lower front cover.
2. Attach the roll shaft holders [B] as shown.

A163 3-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [J] [G]

[K]

[A]

[C]
[E]
[B] [H]
[G]

[A]
[D] [C] [F]

[H]
[I] [I]

3. Attach the roll paper arms [A] to the cutter guide [B]. (Install each arm pin [C]
into each cutter guide hole [D]. Position the cutter guide pin [E] in the lower
slot of the roll paper arm [F].)
4. Install the cutter guide on the roll shaft holder [G].
5. Slide the roll paper shaft [H] into the roll paper.
6. Fit the roll flanges [I] onto the roll paper shaft (both ends).
7. Push the roll flanges [I] inside to fix the roll paper position.
8. Set the roll paper shaft on the roll shaft holder.
9. Set the paper between the cutter guide stay [J] and slide shafts [K].
10. Check the roll cutting rail operation.

SM 3-15 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SERVICE TABLES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
1.1 PM TABLE
Symbol key: I=Inspect L=Lubricate R=Replace A=Adjust C=Clean

2.1KM 4.3KM 6.4KM 8.6KM 10.8KM

EM (3.6K) (7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K) (18K) Notes
( ) A1 sideways/D size
A. Original Feed
1 First original Alcohol
C C
feed roller
2 Second Alcohol
original feed C C
roller
3 1st and 2nd Alcohol
I C I C I
press rollers
4 Original table C C C C C Alcohol
B. Optics
1 Fiber optics Clean with
array lens paper if
necessary
2 Exposure lamp Clean using
water if
necessary
3 Exposure glass Water or
C C C C C C
alcohol
4 Reflection plate C C C C C C Alcohol
C. Development
1 Developer Replace at 20K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
2 Cartridge Clean using a
holder dry cloth if
necessary
3 Entrance seal Clean using a
dry cloth if
necessary
4 Development Clean at 60K
filter (A1 sideways/
D size)

D. Around drum
1 Corona wires C C C C R Dry cloth
2 Grid wires C C C C C Dry cloth
3 Charge corona Dry cloth
end blocks and C C
casing
4 Pre-transfer Clean using
lamp C blower brush if
necessary

SM 4-1 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.1KM 4.3KM 6.4KM 8.6KM 10.8KM
EM (3.6K) (7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K) (18K) Notes
( ) A1 sideways/D size
5 T/S corona Dry cloth
C C C C R
wires
6 T/S corona Dry cloth
end blocks and C C C C C
casing
7 Pick-off pawls C C C C C Dry cloth
8 Quenching Clean using
Lamp C blower brush if
necessary
E. Cleaning
1 Cleaning blade Replace at
20K
I I I I I
(A1 sideways/
D size)
2 Cleaning seal Replace if
I I I I I
damaged
3 Toner tank Empty used
I I I I I
toner

F. Paper Feed
1 Registration Water
C C C C C
roller
2 Paper feed Water
C C C C C
guide plate
3 Manual feed Water
C C C C C
table

G. Fusing
1 Hot roller Replace at
48K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
2 Pressure roller Replace at 60K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
3 Thermistors Clean using
C
suitable solvent
4 Hot roller Clean using
C
strippers suitable solvent
5 Pressure roller Clean using
C C C C C
stripper suitable solvent
6 Entrance guide Clean using
plate suitable
solvent if
necessary
7 Exit turn guide Clean using
C C C C C
alcohol

A163 4-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.1KM 4.3KM 6.4KM 8.6KM 10.8KM
EM (3.6K) (7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K) (18K) Notes
( ) A1 sideways/D size
8 Exit guide plate Clean using
suitable
solvent if
necessary

Others
1 Chain Lubricate with
I I I I I G501 if
necessary
2 Gears Lubricate with
I I I I I G501 if
necessary
3 Ozone filter R R R R R

F. Roll Feeder
1 Feed Roller C C C C C Alcohol

SM 4-3 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE

1. Make a copy Make a copy of OS-A1 chart.

2. Original Feed Clean the original table using alcohol.

(every 3.6K) Inspect the 1st and 2nd press rollers. If they are dirty,
clean them using alcohol.

Original Feed 1. Clean the first and second original feed rollers
(every 7.2K) using alcohol.

2. Clean the first and second press rollers using

alcohol.

3. Optics 1. Clean the reflection plate using alcohol.

(every 3.6K)

2. Clean the exposure glass using water.

3. Clean the exposure lamp using water if necessary.
4. Clean the fiber optics array using lens paper if
necessary.

4. Around Drum NOTE: After removing the drum, wrap it in clear

(every 3.6K) sheets of paper to protect it.
1. Clean the charge corona wire, T& S corona wires
and grid wires using a dry cloth. (Do not expand
the corona wires.)
2. Clean the T/S corona end blocks, casing using a
dry cloth.
3. Clean the pick-off pawls using a dry cloth.
4. Clean the pre-transfer lamp if it is dirty.
5. Clean the quenching lamp if it is dirty.

A163 4-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Around Drum Clean the charge corona end blocks and casing.
(every 7.2K)

Around Drum Replace the charge corona wires and T/S corona
(every 18K) wires.

5. Cleaning Unit 1. Inspect the cleaning blade. Replace it, if it is

(every 3.6K) damaged.

2. Inspect the cleaning seal. Replace it, if it is

damaged.

Cleaning Unit Replace the cleaning blade.

(every 20K)

6. Development Unit 1. Clean the cartridge holder using a dry cloth if it is

(every 3.6K) dirty.

2. Clean the entrance seal using a dry cloth if it is

dirty.
Development Unit Replace the developer.
(every 30K)

Development Unit Clean the development filter.

(every 60K)

SM 4-5 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. Paper Feed 1. Clean the registration roller using water.
(every 3.6K)

2. Clean the paper feed guide plates using water.

3. Clean the manual table using water.

8. Fusing Unit Clean the small separation rollers using suitable

(every 3.6K) solvent.

Fusing Unit 1. Clean the fusing thermistors using suitable

(every 6.4K) solvent.

2. Clean the hot roller strippers using suitable

solvent.
Fusing Unit Replace the hot roller.
(every 48K)

9. Others 1. Inspect the drive chain. Lubricate using G501 if

(every 3.6K) necessary.

2. Inspect the drive gears. Lubricate using G501 if

necessary.
3. Replace the ozone filter.

10. Roll Feeder 1. Clean the feed roller using alcohol.

(every 3.6K)

11. Copy Quality. 1. Check the copy quality.

2. Perform the light sensor adjustment.

A163 4-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 TEST POINTS
Main Board
Number Function
TP101 VAA (+24V)
TP102 Vcc (+5V)
TP103 GND
TP104 Toner density sensor (CN104-A10)
TP105 Light sensor output (CN104-B1)

Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Number Function
TP1 Development Bias Voltage
TP2 Grid Voltage

2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS

Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack
Number Function
VR1 Charge Corona Voltage

Caution: VR1 should not be changed in the field. Charge corona can be
adjusted using SP #--10.

T&S Power Pack

Number Function
VRT Transfer Corona Voltage
VRD (DC) Separation Corona Voltage (DC)
VRD (AC) Separation Corona Voltage (AC)

Caution: VRT, VRD (DC), and VRD (AC) should not be changed in the field.
They can be adjusted using SP #--12 to --17.

SM 4-7 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. SERVICE TOOLS
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change mode or
adjustment values.

3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure

How to access the SP mode for service representatives (All service program
modes can be accessed with this procedure.)
Press the following keys in sequence.

→ → → →

The second time that the key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3
seconds (until the and indicators blink).

How to access the SP mode for customers and sales representatives (SP
modes 1 to 35 are accessible by a customer with this procedure.)

Press key then hold down key more than 3 seconds (until the
and indicators blink).

How to leave the SP mode

Press the following keys in sequence

→ →
or turn off the main switch.
NOTE: Each of the above procedure must be finished within 20 seconds.

How to select the program number

The program number can be selected by the and keys. The
selected program number is displayed in the lead edge erase indicator (the two
digit indicator beside the mark).
To select the program number quickly, hold down or key.

A163 4-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to change settings
1. Access the SP mode and select the program number.

2. Press the key to select the paper length indicator (the four digit
indicator beside the mark).
3. The present setting is displayed in the paper length indicator.

4. Select the setting using the and keys, then press the
key to enter the selected setting.
5. Leave the SP mode.

How to read data

1. Access the SP mode and select the program number.

2. Press the key and select the paper length indicator (the four digit
indicator beside the mark).

3. Press the key, then the paper length indicator shows the data.

4. Press key again to stop displaying the data.

SM 4-9 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table
1: A "*" before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed by
custormers or sales representative.
2: In the data colum, the default value is printed in bold letters. The default
settings for several items depend on the machine destination (refer to page
4-26.).

Mode No. Function Data

Fusing Selects the fusing temperature for plain 0: Mode 1
Temperature 1 paper. 1: Mode 2
(Normal) 2: Mode 3
*1 3: Mode 4
4: Mode 5
5: Mode 6
6: Mode 7
Fusing Selects the fusing temperature for translucent 0: Mode 5
Temperature 2 paper. 1: Mode 6
*2
(High) 2: Mode 7
3: Mode 8
Fusing Selects the fusing temperature for translucent 0: Mode 2
Temperature 3 film. 1: Mode 3
*3
(Low) 2: Mode 4
3: Mode 5
Copy Count Selects the copy count amount up or down. 0: Up
*4
Up/Down 1: Down
Beeper On/Off Selects if the beeper sounds or not. 0: On
1: Off
2: Only when the
edge margin or
*5
paper length is
changed
continuously,
the beeper is off.
Paper Feed Out Selects the time to when the paper is 0: 2 minutes
Waiting Time automatically fed out after it has been set on
1: 1 minute
*6 Setting the manual table, or after the Roll Feed 2: 3 minutes
Select key is pressed. 3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
Manual Feed Start Selects the time to when the registration 0: 2 seconds
Time Setting roller starts rotating after the entrance sensor 1: 0.7 second
detects the paper leading edge. 2: 1 second
3: 3 seconds
*7
4: 4 seconds
5: 5 seconds

A163 4-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 1/26/96
Mode No. Function Data
Leading Edge To change the leading edge margin (print Count up/down at
Increase/Decrease number) increase/decrease speed, the every:
Speed Setting customer holds down the + or -- key. Then, 0: 0.1 second
*8 after a few 0.25 second intervals (See SP 1: 0.50 second
mode 12), the speed begins to change. SP 2: 0.25 second
mode 8 determines the rate of speed 3: 0.05 second
increase/decrease. 4: 0.02 second
Auto Reset Time Selects the time to return to the initial setting. 0: 2 minutes
Setting 1: 1 minutes
2: 3 minutes
*9
3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: No auto reset
Auto Energy The machine goes into energy saver mode at 0: No
*10 Saver Mode auto reset time. 1: Auto Energy
Saver Mode
Screen Message Selects one of the options indicated on the 0: None
Setting display in the energy saver mode. 1: Pre-HEAt
2: HEllo i lovE yoU
*11 3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4: SLEEPinG
5: HAvE A Good
dAy.
Leading Edge The leading edge margin (print number, 0: 3 intervals
Increase/Decrease paper length) increase/decrease speed starts 1: 1 intervals
to change several 0.25 second intervals after
*12 Adjustment 2: 2 intervals
Preliminary Interval the customer starts the adjustment 3: 10 intervals
procedure. This SP mode adjusts the
number of 0.25 second intervals.
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
Auto Off Auto off time can be selected 1 ~ 120 minutes
⇒ 15 (1 minute per step)
Default: 30 minutes
16 Not Used
to
19
Paper Length Selects if the paper length is in count down or 0: Down
Count Up/Down up when the preset cut key is pressed. (Long → Short)
*20
Setting 1: Up
(Short → Long)
Paper Length To change the paper length 0: 0.10 second
Up/Down Speed increase/decrease speed, the customer holds 1: 0.5 second
Setting down the + or -- key. Then, after a few 0.25 2: 0.25 second
*21 second intervals (See SP mode 12), the 3: 0.05 second
speed begins to change. SP mode 21 4: 0.02 second
determines the rate of speed 5: 0.01 second
increase/decrease.
Fixed Paper Size Selects the fixed paper size pattern chosen Refer to page 4-25.
*22
Pattern Setting when the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.
Optional Paper Up to 10 different paper size can be stored UdEF: Undefined
*23 Size Setting from 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No.
to 22, this data is used as fixed paper size when
*32 the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.

SM 4-11 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 12/22/95
Mode No. Function Data
Optional Paper Up to 10 different paper size can be stored UdEF: Undefined
Size Setting from 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No.
*23
22, this data is used as fixed paper size when
to
the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.
*32

33 Not Used
to
34
All Indicators On Turns on all the indicators on the operation 0: No
*35 panel when the Roll Feed Select key is 1: All indicators on
pressed.
New Developer Carries out the new developer initialization for If the initialization is
Initialization 5 minutes. The machine counts down the canceled before
remaining time on the display. After the returning to the
initialization, the machine automatically normal operating
adjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0 ± 0.1V. mode, do it again
36
During the toner sensor adjustment, "Adj" is from the beginning. If
displayed. When the adjustment is the machine fails to
completed, the machine automatically returns adjust the toner
to normal operating mode. sensor output, "E=11"
is indicated.
37 Not Used
Release Fusing Recovers from the fusing unit SC condition. 0: Release SC
38 Unit Service Call After it has been recovered, the machine 1: SC condition
returns to its initial (power on) condition.
39 Not Used
Roll Feeder Identify the roll feeder installation. 0: No
40 Identification 1: Roll Feeder
Installed
Roll Feeder To adjust the paper feed speed of the roll 0: Standard
41 Speed Setting feeder. --50 ← 0 → 50
(Factory Use) Faster Slower
Roll Feeder To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the 0: Standard
Cutting Length plain paper mode. --9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm
42
Adjustment (300 Longer Shorter
mm, Plain Paper)
Roll Feeder To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the
Cutting Length translucent paper mode.
43 Adjustment (300
mm, Translucent
Paper)
Roll Feeder To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the
Cutting Length translucent film mode.
44 Adjustment (300
mm, translucent
Film)

A163 4-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Roll Feeder To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm in 0: Standard
Cutting Length the plain paper mode. --50.0←0→ 50.0 mm
45
Adjustment (1100 Longer Shorter
mm, Plain Paper)
Roll Feeder To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm in
Cutting Length the translucent paper mode.
46 Adjustment (1100
mm, translucent
Paper)
Roll Feeder To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm in
Cutting Length the translucent film mode.
47 Adjustment (1100
mm, Translucent
Film)
48 Not Used
Main Motor Speed To change the main motor speed. 0: Standard
Adjustment --9 ← 0 → 11
Slower Faster
If the main motor
speed is incorrect,
49 PJ56 or PJ57 will be
indicated when a long
copy is made. In
these cases this
adjustment is
required.
Toner End Determines the possible number of copies 0: 27 sheets
Detection Setting (when A1 paper is used) after the toner near 1: 9 sheets
50
end condition. 2: 18 sheets
3: 36 sheets
Used Toner Determines the total copy length before the 0: 1220
toner overflow indicator lights. 1: 610
2: 915
3: 1000
4: 1464
5: 1830
51
6: 2000
7: 2440
8: No overflow
indication
9: 10m (Should be
used for test)
Used Toner Indicates the copy length after clearing the tF=XX,XXX
Counter used toner counter. This counter is (Beeper)
52 automatically cleared if the clear mode key is
pressed after turning off and on the main
switch in the full toner condition.

SM 4-13 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Used Toner Clear used toner counter. 0: Full toner
Counter Clear condition is not
detected
1: Full toner
53 condition is
detected.
To clear the counter,
input "0" even if "0" is
already indicated.
Developer Determines the warm-up time to increase the 0: 1 minute
Warm-up Setting Q/M of the developer. This warm-up is done 1: 2 minute
54
if the fusing temperature is lower than 60°C 2: 3 minute
when the main switch is turned on. 3: None
Paper Length Determines the maximum paper length. (In mm mode)
Limit Setting Note: 0: 2000 mm
If paper longer than 2000 mm is used, skew 1: 3600 mm
copy, poor fusing, crease copy original 2: 5200 mm
damage might occur. 3: 6800 mm
4: 8400 mm
5: 9999 mm
55
(In inch mode)
0: 80.0 inch
1: 160.0 inch
2: 240.0 inch
3: 320.0 inch
4: 400.0 inch
5: 480.0 inch
Copy Number Determines the maximum copy number. 0: 99 sheets
Limit Setting 1: 10 sheets
2: 20 sheets
3: 30 sheets
4: 40 sheets
56
5: 50 sheets
6: 67 sheets
7: 70 sheets
8: 80 sheets
9: 90 sheets
57 Not Used
to
58
Misfeed Special While the Emergency Stop key is held down, 0: No
59 Recovery Mode the main motor and the registration clutch are 1: Misfeed Special
energized. Recovery Mode
Fixed Paper Each time +/-- key is pressed while holding 0: Normal
Length Special the Preset Cut key down, the length selected 1: Fixed Paper
60
Mode in SP mode 61 is increased/reduced from the Length Special
preset paper size. Mode

A163 4-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Fixed Paper Selects the interval of each step for SP60. (In mm mode)
Length Special 0: 100 mm
Mode 1: 50 mm
2: 60 mm
3: 120 mm
4: 200 mm
5: 240 mm
6: 250 mm
7: 500 mm
8: 600 mm
61
(In inch mode)
0: 10.0 inch
1: 5.0 inch
2: 6.0 inch
3: 12.0 inch
4: 20.0 inch
5: 24.0 inch
6: 25.0 inch
7: 50.0 inch
8: 60.0 inch
Special Toner In the energy saver mode, 10% toner supply 0: No
Supply Mode is done while the "Emergency Stop" key is 1: Special Toner
62 pressed. Toner sensor voltage is displayed Supply Mode
on the "Paper Length" indicator. If the voltage
is lower than 1V, toner is not supplied.
63 Not Used
SP Mode Display Selects the indication speed on the display. 0: 300 ms/letter
Speed Setting 1: 100 ms/letter
64 2: 200 ms/letter
3: 400 ms/letter
4: 500 ms/letter
ROM Version Indicates the ROM version. Example:
Display vEr_1994_06_06_01

65 Year Date
Month
Internal Use Only

RAM Abnormal Displays the total number of abnormal A number is added if

Condition Check conditions of the back-up RAM. an abnormal RAM
66 condition is detected
when the machine is
powered on.
67 Not Used
to
69

SM 4-15 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Total Copy Displays the total copy length/number SP70: t0 = XXX,XXX
Length/Number according to the following units. SP71: t1=XXX,XXX
Display SP70 = Yard SP72: t2=XXX,XXX
70 SP71 = meter SP73: t3=XXX,XXX
to SP72 = 100 inches SP74: t4=XXX,XXX
75 SP73 = 50 inches SP75: t5=XXX,XXX
SP74 = A1 length (594 mm)
SP75 = sheet (any size)

OPC Counter Displays the total length of copied paper after do = XX,XXX
the OPC drum is installed. This counter should
76 be cleared when the
OPC drum is
replaced. (SP #--1)
Developer Displays the total length [m] of copied paper dE = XX,XXX
Counter Display after the new developer is poured. This counter is
automatically cleared
77
when the new
developer
initialization is done.
Toner Counter Displays the total length of copied paper [m] dt = XX,XXX
Display after a new toner cartridge is installed. This counter is
78 automatically cleared
when the new toner
cartridge is installed.
Toner Supply Indicates the present toner sensor level. dL = ab -- -- c
Level Indication a: Toner density
setting n, H, L
b: TS level
0~5
c: Copy number step
79
0: ~30m
1: ~60m
3: ~90m
4: ~120m
5: ~150m
6: 150m ~
Number of Displays the total number of paper misfeeds J❏ = XXX
Misfeeds by by location. Misfeed location codes displayed Jt = Total Jam
Location in each SP number are as follows:
80 SP80: Jt, J90, J98, J99
to SP81: J01, J02, J03, J04
85 SP82: J20, J21, J22, J23
SP83: J30, J31, J32
SP84: J40, J41, J42, J43
SP85: J56, J57, J58, J59

A163 4-16 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Misfeed Record Displays the locations of the last five J1 = XX (Last jam)
Display misfeeds one after the other. ↓
J2 = XX (1 before
the last jam)
↓
J3 = XX (2 before
the last jam)
↓
86
J4 = XX (3 before
the last jam)
↓
J5 = XX (4 before
the last jam)
↓
Beeper
(XX = Jam Location)
87 Not Used
to
89
Number of Displays the total number of service calls E❏ = XXX
Service Calls by (SC) by location. SC codes displayed in each Et = Total SCs
90
Location SP number are as follows:
to
SP90: Et, E1, E9, E10, E11
92
SP91: E2, E3, E4, E5
SP92: E6, E7, E8
Service Call Displays the last five service calls one after E1 = XX (The last
Records the other. error code)
↓
E2 = XX (1 before
the last error code)
↓
E3 = XX (2 before
the last error code)
93 ↓
E4 = XX (3 before
the last error code)
↓
E5 = XX (4 before
the last error code)
↓
Beeper
(XX= Error Code)
94 Not Used
to
99

SM 4-17 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
RAM Clear Clears selected data items form the RAM. To 0: Not Used
clear the memory, input the number of the 1: Copy Number
item you want to delete, then press the Counter
(The memory for
key.
SP75)
Note:
2: Copy Length
If all the memory is cleared (if a number from
Counter
20 to 28 is selected), reinput the factory
(SP70 to 74)
settings that are shown on the decal attached
3: OPC Counter
inside the upper right cover.
(SP76)
Please refer to page 4-26 to know the default
4: Developer
settings for each destination. (When No. 10
Counter
to 26 is selected.)
--1 (SP77)(*Note1)
5: Toner Counter
(SP78)
6: Counter for toner
density
step.(*Note2)
7: Clear data No.1 to
9 and 53.
8: SC Counter
(SP90 to 93)
9: Jam Counter
(SP80 to 86)
10: Not Used

* Note: 1
This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on
page 2-16).
* Note: 2
For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to
0 (m) after the developer initialization. When the developer initialization is
done, this counter to 150 and after 150m of copies, the counter stays at 0.
If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

A163 4-18 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
11: Change the
setting to the
U.S.A. version

12: Not Used

13: Not Used

14: Not Used

15: Not Used

16: Not Used

17: Factory use

18: Not Used

--1
19: Not Used

20: Not Used

21: Clear all the

memories and
change the setting
to the U.S.A
version

22: Not Used

23: Not Used

24: Not Used

25: Not Used

26: Not Used

--1 27: Factory use

28: Clear all the
memories
Total Counter Unit Selects the unit in which the total counter 0: 1 yard
Setting counts up by. 1: 1 m
2: 100 inches
--2 3: 50 inches
4: A1 length
(594 mm)
5. Sheet (Any size)
Inch/mm Selects the unit in which the edge margin and 0: mm
--3
Exchange paper length is indicated by. 1: Inch
--4 Not Used
Registration Adjusts the paper registration. 0: Standard
--5 Adjustment --9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm
Advance Delay

SM 4-19 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Light Sensor Change the light sensor setting. 50: Standard
Adjustment Turn on and off the exposure lamp using the 0 ← 50 → 99
--6 Copy Media key. Darker Lighter
Tracing paper: ON
Film: OFF
Hot Roller Change the hot roller temperature setting. 0: Standard
--7 Temperature --9 ← 0 → 9°C
Adjustment Decrease Increase
Pressure Roller Change the pressure roller temperature 0: Standard
--8 Temperature setting. --9 ← 0 → 9°C
Adjustment Decrease Increase
Hot Roller/ Displays the hot roller temperature and Fu = XXX
Pressure Roller pressure roller temperature. Pr = XXX
Temperature Even if the SP mode is canceled when the Fu: Hot roller
Display temperature is displayed, the temperature is temperature
continuously displayed during stand-by Pr: Pressure roller
condition or copy cycle. temperature
To release this condition, turn the main If the hot roller temperature
switch off and on. is lower than 100 °C
(pressure roller
--9 temperature is lower
than 50°C), "LLL" is
indicated.
If the hot roller
temperature is higher
than 210°C (pressure
roller temperature is
higher than 180°C),
"HHH" is indicated.

Drum Charge Determines the drum charge voltage. 200: Standard

Setting In this mode, the charge corona can be 150 ← 200 → 249
turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Low High
--10
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

Copy Grid Setting Determines the copy grid voltage. 9: Standard

In this mode, the grid voltage can be turned 0 ← 9 → 15
on and off using the Copy Media key. Low High
--11
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

Transfer Corona Determines the transfer corona voltage. 80: Standard

Voltage Setting In this mode, the transfer corona can be 40 ← 80 → 120
turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Low High
--12
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

Transfer Voltage Determines the transfer corona voltage at the 120: Standard
at Paper Trailing paper trailing edge. 40 ← 120 → 249
Edge Setting In this mode, the transfer corona can be Low High
--13 turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

A163 4-20 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Separation AC Determines the AC separation corona 170: Standard
Voltage Setting voltage. 130 ← 170 → 220
In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High
--14 turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

Separation AC Determines the AC separation corona 190: Standard

Voltage at the voltage at the paper leading edge. 130 ← 190 → 220
Paper Leading In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High
--15 Edge Setting turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

Separation DC Determines the DC separation corona 200: Standard

Voltage Setting voltage. 0 ← 200 → 249
In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High
turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
--16
Translucent Film = OFF

Separation DC Determines the DC separation corona 200: Standard

Voltage at the voltage at the paper leading edge. 0 ← 200 → 249
Paper Leading In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High
--17 Edge Setting turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

--18 Not Used

to
--19
Bias Voltage for Determines the development bias voltage for 3: Standard
the Image Area the image area. 0←3→8
Setting In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned Low High
--20 on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

Bias Voltage for Determines the development bias voltage for 4: Standard
Non-image Area the non-image area. 0←4→8
Setting In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned Low High
--21 on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

SM 4-21 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Toner Density Selects the toner density setting. The toner 0: Standard
Setting density changes according to the copy length 1: Low
after the developer is replaced. 2: High

Copy length
Std. Low High
(A1 size)
~ 30 m
4.25V 4.35V 4.00V
(~50 sheets)
~ 60 m
--22 4.00V 4.30V 3.50V
(~100 sheets)
~ 90 m
3.50V 4.25V 3.00V
(~150 sheets)
~ 120 m
3.00V 3.75V 2.50V
(~200 sheets)
~ 150 m
2.50V 3.25V 2.00V
(~250 sheets)

23 Not Used
to
24
Toner Density Changes the toner density sensor voltage. 80: Standard
Sensor Voltage Normally, the value is automatically adjusted 50 ← 80 → 120
Setting when the new developer initialization (SP36) Low High
is done.
--30 In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL and the
bias voltage for non-image area can be
turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
Toner Sensor Displays the toner sensor output voltage for A = X,XX
--31 Voltage Display the last copy. (Beeper)
(Last Copy)

A163 4-22 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Toner Sensor Displays the real time toner sensor output A = X,XX
Voltage Display voltage.
(Real Time) In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and A = Toner Sensor
the bias voltage for non-image areas can be Voltage
turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON During the stand-by
Translucent Film = OFF condition, and copy
Even if the SP mode is canceled when the cycling the following
voltage is displayed, the voltage is displayed data is displayed.
during the stand-by condition or copy cycling A=X,XX
(the toner sensor output voltage, paper ↓
--32 length and copy counter are displayed one LE=X,XXX
after the other). ↓
To release this condition, turn the main CO=XX
switch off and on. ↓
(Beeper)

LE = Paper Length
(ex.
297 mm: LE=0.297
12 inch: LE=0.120)
CO=Copy counter
--33 Not Used
to
--44
Forced Ready Goes to "Ready" condition ignoring the fusing 0: Normal
Condition temperature. This mode cannot be used 1: Forced Ready
--50
(Factory Use) during the development idling. Condition

Lamp Off Mode Fluorescent lamp does not turn on during the 0: Normal
--51
copy cycle. 1: Lamp off
No Misfeed Ignores jam detections except for initial 0: Normal
--52 Detection Mode jams. The setting automatically returns to "0" 1: No Misfeed
when the main switch is turned off. Detection
Free Run Mode The machine caries out copy operation 0: Normal
without an original. This mode can be used if 1: Next Paper is fed
the optional roll feeder is installed and when the fusing
selected paper length is more than 594mm. exit sensor is
The machine starts operation when the roll deactivated.
--53
feed select key is pressed, and stops when 2~250: Next paper is
the Emergency Stop key is pressed. fed (X-1) seconds
after the fusing exit
sensor is deactivated.
X = Input Number
--54 Not Used
to
--59
Fluorescent Lamp Counts the time when the exposure sensor is 0~250: The total time
Abnormal Time more than 1 V higher than the target value. (seconds) that the
--60 Check 1 lamp voltage is more
than 1 volt higher
than the target value.

SM 4-23 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mode No. Function Data
Fluorescent Lamp Counts the time when the fluorescent lamp is 0~250: The total time
Abnormal Time in full power during the copy cycle. (seconds) that the
--61
Check 2 fluorescent lamp is at
full power.
--62 Not Used
--63 Factory Use Only
Manual Feed Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on the 0: NO
--64 Attention Mode 1 manual feed table before the "Set Paper"1: Manual Feed
indicator lights. Attention Mode 1
Manual Feed Beeper sounds when the manual table is 0: NO
--65 Attention Mode 2 ready to accept the next sheet. 1: Manual Feed
Attention Mode 2
Partial copy Enable to make "+" margin in the partial copy 0: NO
Leading Edge mode, ("--" margin cannot be made.) 1: "+" margin can be
--66
Margin made in the part
copy mode
Toner Full Supply In the Special Toner Supply mode (SP62), if 0: NO
Mode the "clear/stop" key is pressed while the 1: Toner Full Supply
--67
"Emergency Stop" key is pressed, 100%, Mode
toner supply is done.
Combine Originals Normally the copy process stops at the 0: Normal
Mode trailing edge of paper or original which ever 1: Combine
comes first. If this mode is selected, copy Originals Mode
--68 process continues to the paper trailing edge
even if the original trailing edge comes first.
Using this mode, several originals can be
combined on copy sheet.

A163 4-24 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No.22)

In mm Mode
0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297
1: 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245
2: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, 600,
500, 400, 300, 245
3: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245
4: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245
5: 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 245
6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 257
7: 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 245
8: 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 245
9: 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813, 788,
765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 257
10: 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 245
11: 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 245
12: 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400, 1350,
1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550,
500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245
13: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550,
500, 420, 297, 245
14: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420,
364, 297, 245
15: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 245
16: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 245
17: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 245
18: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 245
19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

In inch Mode
0: 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0
1: 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
2: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
3: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
4: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
5: 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.6
6: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0, 9.6
7: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
8: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
9: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0,
12.0, 11.0, 9.6
10: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5, 45.0,
42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0, 9.6
11: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0,
34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
12: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0,
24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6

SM 4-25 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 13: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0,
22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
14: 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0,
50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0,
20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6
15: 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.6
16: 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
17: 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0,
36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.6
18: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3,
18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.6
19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings (SP # --1)

SP. No. U.S.A.
#1 2
#2 0
#3 1
#4 0
#5 2
#6 0
#8 0
#9 0
#10 0
#20 1
#21 0
#22 0
#--2 5
#--3 1

A163 4-26 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE
The input check mode allows you to check the current status of electrical
components (such as sensors, switches, etc.) from the operation panel.
The output check mode allows you to turn the individual electrical components
(such as motors, solenoids, etc.) ON/OFF from the operation panel.

3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE

How to access the output check mode
Press the following keys in sequence.

→ → → →

The second time that the key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3
seconds (until the and indicators blink).

How to leave the input/output check mode

Press the following keys in sequence.

→ →
or turn off the main switch.
NOTE: Each of the above procedures must be finished within 20 seconds.

How to select the program number

The program number can be selected by pressing the and keys.

To select an input check mode, press the key.

To select an output check mode, press the key.

The selected number is displayed on the lead edge erase indicator (the two digit
indicator beside the mark).

To select the program number quickly, hold down the or key.

SM 4-27 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE
The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed on the paper
length indicator ("ON" or "OFF" is displayed.). If a program number not used is
selected, "NOT" is displayed.

Program
Sensor/Switch /Signal
No.
--1 Registration Sensor
--2 Exit Sensor
--3 Original Registration Sensor
--4 Entrance Sensor
Main Motor LOC Signal (Status is
--5 "ON" when the main motor is normally
rotating.)
Door Switch (Status is "ON" when the
--6
door is open.)
--7 to --9 Not Used
--10 R/F Leading Edge Sensor
--11 Roll Feeder Door Switch
--12 Right Cutter Switch
--13 Left Cutter Switch
--14 Paper End Sensor

A163 4-28 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE
Press the key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of
the component is displayed on the paper length indicator.

To turn off the component, press the key again.

Program
Electrical Component
No.
0 Main Motor
1 Toner Supply Clutch
2 Pick off solenoid
3 Registration Clutch
4 Total Counter
5 Pre-transfer Lamp
6 Quenching Lamp
7 Fusing Lamp
8 Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio)
9 Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)
10 Main Charge Corona
11 Grid Voltage
12 Transfer Charge Corona
13 Not Used
14 Separation Charge Corona
15 to 19 Not Used
20 Bias Voltage for the Image Area
21 Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area
22 Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage
Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for
23 the Non-image Area + Quenching
Lamp
24 to 25 Not Used
26 Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters
27 Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note
28 Roller Feeder Paper Feed Motor

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutter
switches. The number of the movement (0~9999) is displayed on the
paper length indicator.

SM 4-29 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE
The initial setting, when the main switch is turned on, can be changed in this
mode. The procedure is as follows:

1. Turn on the main switch while holding the Emergencey stop key down
and indicators blink).
2. Input the operation panel setting that the customer requires (paper size,
image density, etc.).
3. Turn off the main switch.
The setting, just before the main switch is turned off, is memorized as the power
on initial setting. It appears again when the main switch is turned on.

A163 4-30 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. JAM CODE LIST
When a document (original) jam or paper jam occurs, the cause of the jam is
displayed by using the following jam code.

4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE

1. When a document jam or paper jam occurs, press and hold the Clear/Stop
key.
2. Read the jam code.

4.2 JAM CODE TABLE

Code Cause of Jam SP Mode No.
PJ01 Initial misfeed at the registration sensor. SP81
PJ02 Initial misfeed at the exit sensor. (Initial Jams)
PJ03 Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor.
PJ04 Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor.
Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the roll
PJ05
feeder.
Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leading SP82
PJ20
edge. (Manual Feed and
PJ21 Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Registration Jams)
PJ22 Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
PJ23 Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge.
PJ30 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge. SP83
PJ31 Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. (Jams at Fusing Unit)
PJ32 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leading SP84
PJ40
edge. (Roll Feeder Jams)
Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leading
PJ41
edge.
PJ42 Paper cutter failure.
PJ43 Door open during the roll feeding.
Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailing SP85
PJ56
edge. (Roll Feeder Jams)
Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailing
PJ57
edge.
PJ58 Entrance sensor ON during the roll feeding.
Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge
PJ59
(in roll feeding).

SM 4-31 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Code Cause of Jam SP Mode No.
Roll feeder. SP80
PJ90 motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm more (Others)
than the maximum paper length.
Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed
PJ98
2500 mm.
Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper
PJ99
is fed 2500 mm.

NOTE: To display total jam number, access SP mode No. 80.

A163 4-32 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

No. DESCRIPTION PART NO. REMARKS

1 Digital Multimeter 54209507 BECKMAN RMS3030
Deluxe Test Lead BECKMAN DL241
2 54209508
Accessory Kit
3 Grease -- Mobil Temp.78 54479078 400 g/can
4 Grease-G501 52039501
5 Current Measuring Drum A0239520
Test Chart OS-A1
6 A0239504
(2 sheets/set)
7 Spring Hook 54199653
8 Setting Powder 54429101

SM 4-33 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. SERVICE REMARKS
6.1 DRUM UNIT
6.1.1 Drum
The organic photoconductor drum is comparatively more sensitive to light and
ammonia gas than a selenium drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a
minute.
3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is
touched with a finger or becomes dirty, wipe with a dry cloth or clean with wet
cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when inserting or pulling the
drum unit out of the copier to avoid exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight.
This will protect the drum from light fatigue.
9. Before removing the drum, place a sheet of paper under the drum to catch
any falling toner.
10. Dispose of used drums according to local regulations.
11. Perform the light sensor adjustment when a new drum is installed.
12. Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.
13. Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when removing or
reinstalling the drum.
14. When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press too
strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.

A163 4-34 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 15. When the drum unit is removed from the copier, do not close the paper path
section if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides open the paper
path section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If you close the
paper path section, take care not to injure yourself by opening the paper path
section. Also, releasing only one side of the paper path section deform the
copier machine, which may cause paper jam and copy image problem.
Release both levers together while holding the paper path section to open the
paper path section slowly.
16. The drum unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping the
drum unit when removing and installing it.

6.2 CHARGE CORONA

1. The wire can also be cleaned with a blower brush. If the wire is cleaned with
a dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched. Do not use
sand paper or a solvent.
2. Do not touch the corona wire and the grid wires with oily hands. Oil stains
may cause uneven image density on copies.
3. Make sure that the corona wire is correctly positioned and that there is no
foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.
4. Clean the grid wires with a dry cloth.
5. When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2 connectors (C
for the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are set properly.
6. Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight slots, are all
straight, and not crossed.
7. Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires.
8. Make sure that the wire junction is positioned inside the right endblock.

SM 4-35 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6.3 OPTICS
1. Clean the exposure glass with water or alcohol.
2. Clean the fiber optics array with lens paper or silicone cloth.
3. Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide plate when
reassembling.
4. Make sure that the direction of the aperture of the exposure lamp is towards
the fiber optics array side (rear side) when reassembling.
5. When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side of the fiber optics
array by touching the optics side plate.

6.4 DEVELOPMENT
1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller.
2. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
3. Initial conditioning (SP#36) is necessary when the developer is replaced.
4. Dispose of used developer according to local regulations.
5. Do not loosen the painted screws which determine the development doctor
blade height and do not push the doctor blade too hard, otherwise the doctor
gap may change.
6. Be careful not to bend the bias terminal.
7. When the development unit is removed from the copier, do not close the
paper path section if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides open
the paper path section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If you
close the paper path section, be careful not to injure yourself when opening
the paper path section. Also, releasing only one side of the paper path
section deform the copier machine, which may cause paper jam and copy
image problem. Release both levers together while holding the paper path
section to open the paper path section slowly.
8. The development unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping
the development unit when removing and installing it.
9. During the developer initialization, do not turn off the main switch, or do not
open the original feed unit or the paper path section, or do not unplug the
copier power cord. If these conditions happen, do the developer initialization
again, the toner density sensor cannot be adjusted.

A163 4-36 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
1. Clean the corona wires with a blower brush. If the wires are cleaned with a
dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched.
2. When adjusting the corona current, always use the drum current
measuring drum.
3. Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it down
when reinstalling.
4. Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may cause
uneven charge on the drum.
5. Do not expand and bend the corona wires.
6. Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,... etc.) as this
will damage the corona wire.
7. Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven charge on
the drum.

6.6 CLEANING UNIT

1. Be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning blade.
2. Dispose of used toner according to local regulations.
3. Do not press the cleaning blade too hard. Otherwise, the drum unit may
deform.
4. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure several
times manually, and then hold down the cleaning blade gently along its entire
length ensure that the cleaning blade contacts the drum. Otherwise, cleaning
failure may occur.
5. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on the edge of the
cleaning blade.
6. Empty the toner collection bottle every service call and clear the memory
counter SP#52 for used toner overflow detection by SP#53. Do not perform
SP#53 without emptying the toner collection bottle.
If "FULL" is indicated in the copy counter, SP#52 can also be reset to 0 by
pressing the Clear Modes/Standby key after opening and closing the paper
path section. Instruct customers to deal with the toner collection bottle if the
"FULL" condition is indicated.

SM 4-37 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 9/27/96
6.7 FUSING UNIT
1. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers and tension
springs.
2. Do not touch the fusing lamp with bare hands.
3. Make sure that the fusing lamp does not touch the hot roller.
4. Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor and pressure roller
thermistor when removing and reinstalling hot roller or the pressure
roller.
5. The fusing unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping the
fusing unit when removing and installing it.

⇒ 6.7A PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE

The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressure
roller should be replaced.
1. Access Sp mode with the steps below.
In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key,
Clear/Stop key, press and hold the Clear/Stop key again for longer than
3 seconds.
2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below.
a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicators lights.
If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, press Function Select key
until it lights.
b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to select
Lamp Off Mode.)
c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights.
d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp Off
Mode.)
e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode.

3. To prevent a paper misfeed create a lead edge margin with the steps
below.
a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights.
b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value)
is indicated.

4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paper
or thicker plain paper with vertical grain direction.
Note: Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting to
the mode which is one step lower than the proper setting for
the particular kind of paper. For example, if the proper
setting is Mode 3, select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSB
No. FW740-010 for more information regarding the proper
settings for particular types of paper and the adjustment
procedure for non-listed papers.

A163 4-38 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 9/27/96
5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately
5 times.
6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond with
the scraped parts of the pressure roller. If white lines and/or bands
appear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a new one.
7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "Lamp
Off Mode", "Lead Margin" and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to the
original settings.

6.8 ORIGINAL FEED

1. Do not touch the original feed rollers, original registration rollers, platen
roller and press rollers with bare hands.
2. Clean the white plate with water or alcohol.

6.9 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the manual feed rollers and registration rollers with bare
hands.

Service Tables
2. A worn out registration roller causes paper to crease. It should be
replaced.

6.10 ROLL FEEDER

1. The copier is not attached to the table and roll feeder is attached to the
table and copier. Do not lift the copier from the table, otherwise roll
feeder unit is deformed.
2. When the copier and roll feeder is moved, loosen the screws for angle
bracket and spacer and retighten them for absorb floor distortion.

6.11 OTHERS
1. When replacing the main board, if the RAM on the old main board is still
usable, remove and place it on the new main board. Then, install the new
main board in the copier.
2. After installing the new main board with a new RAM, clear the RAM
memory. (Do not clear RAM memory if you have placed the old RAM on
the new main board.)
3. Take care not to damage the mylars on the rear feed table during
servicing.
4. When replacing a sensor, do not overtighten the screws. This may
damage the sensor.

SM 4-39 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 REPLACEMENT AND
ADJUSTMENT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. EXTERIOR COVERS

[A] [B]
[J]

[C] [I]

[H]

[G]
[D] [F]
[E]

1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL

1.1.1 Left Upper Cover
1. Remove the left upper cover [A] (2 screws).

1.1.2 Left Lower Cover

1. Open the paper path section [B].
2. Remove the left lower cover [C] (2 screws).

1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL

1.2.1 Right Upper Cover
1. Remove the right upper cover [D] (2 screws).

1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers
1. Open the paper path section.
2. Remove the right lower cover [E] (2 screws), right lower middle cover [F], and
toner collection bottle [G].
3. Remove the right lower rear cover [H] (1 screw).

1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL

1.3.1 Rear Cover
1. Remove the rear cover [I] (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the rear cover, push in the rear cover hooking
portion [J] over the copier bottom plate as shown.

SM 5-1 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. OPTICS
[C]
[A] [D]

[B]

[E]

[G]

[F]

2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the left and right upper covers.
2. Remove the copy tray [A].
3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feed
unit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (2 connectors).
4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends.
5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn and
remove.

A163 5-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [F] [C]

[C]

[B]
[E]

[D]
[A]

2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL

1. Remove the original feed unit.
2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the rear original guide plate [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting up
the left side as shown.
NOTE: Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide
plate when reassembling.

2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL

1. Remove the exposure glass.
2. Remove the front original guide plate [D] (2 screws).
NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the
exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp.
3. Turn the exposure lamp [E] 1/4 of a turn and remove.
NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [F] of the exposure lamp
is towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).

SM 5-3 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL

[C]

[B]

[D]

[A]

1. Follow the steps from 1 to 3 of the exposure lamp removal.

2. Remove the original registration sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Lift up the fiber optics array [B] and remove it from the left side by sliding it
out to the right side as shown.
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [C] of
the fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [D].

A163 5-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]

1. Remove the exposure lamp.

2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).
3. Perform light sensor adjustment. See page 5-39

SM 5-5 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. DEVELOPMENT
3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL

[B]

[A]

[C]

1. Remove the left and right upper cover.

2. Open the paper path section and original feed unit.
3. Remove the toner supply cover [A].
4. Remove the manual entrance feed cover [B] (2 pins).
5. Remove the paper feed driven unit [C] (2 screws and 1 connector).

A163 5-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]
[B]
[A]

[A]

[B]

[A]
[E]

[C] [D]

[F] [F]

[G]

6. Remove the 4 shoulder screws [A] and 2 screws [B] fixing the development
unit.
7. Disconnect the 14p connector [C] and remove it out of the cutout [D].
8. Remove the development unit [E].

CAUTION: Do not loosen the painted screws [F] which determine the
development doctor blade height and do not push the doctor
blade [G] too strongly, otherwise the doctor gap may change.

SM 5-7 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL
[B]
[C]

[A]

[D]

NOTE: Be careful not to bend the bias terminal.

1. Remove the development unit and place it on a large sheet of paper [A] as
shown.
2. Remove the toner supply unit casing [B] (2 pins) and development filter [C]
and bracket [C] and clean them.
3. Stand up the development unit as shown (the drive section of the unit is the
upper side).
4. Turn the paddle roller knob [D] clockwise. The developer will fall out onto the
paper.
5. Repeat step 4 until all of the developer has been dumped out.
6. Clean the development unit prior to reassembling. Especially, clean the right
end of the unit.

A163 5-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]

[E]

[D]

[B]

[A]

1. Remove the development unit.

2. Disconnect the harness connector [A] and take the harness from the 2
clamps [B].
3. Remove the 2 screws [C] of the toner density sensor holder.
4. Pull out the harness from the toner density sensor side until the relay
connector [D] appears.
5. Replace the toner density sensor [E] (2 screws and 1 connector).

SM 5-9 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]

1. Remove the paper feed driven unit (follow the steps from 1 to 5 of the
development unit removal).
2. Remove the PTL assembly [A] (4 screws, 3 connectors, and 4 clamps [B]).

A163 5-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack is

replaced.
Preparation:
1. Turn off the main switch, and remove the rear cover.
2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, and
connect the voltage terminal to TP1 on the charge/bias/grid power pack.
3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V.
4. Turn on the main switch.

3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --180 ± 10 V.
1. Access SP mode and select No. --20.

2. Press the key to turn on the bias voltage.

3. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press
the key and then change the voltage using and
keys.

4. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.

SM 5-11 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area
ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --200 ± 10V
1. Access SP mode and select No. --21.

2. Press the key to turn on the bias voltage.

3. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press
the key and then change the voltage using and
keys.

4. If the voltage is within the standard, press the key.

A163 5-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. DRUM UNIT
4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[B]
[A]

[F]

[C]

[D] [E]

1. Remove the development unit.

2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends.
3. Remove the timing belt [B] and disconnect the harness connector [C].
4. Remove the drum unit [D].
5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor.
NOTE: (1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on
the pins [F] of the copier side plates.
(2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.

SM 5-13 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT

[E] [D]
[F] [B]
[C]

[B]
[A]

1. Remove the drum unit.

2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring).
3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each).
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when
removing or reinstalling the drum.
4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft.
5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it counter clockwise as shown.
6. Remove the drum flange [E].
7. Replace the drum with new one.
NOTE: when reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the
projection of the gear is on the drum side.

A163 5-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT

[E
[A]
[B]

[D]

[C] [F]

1. Remove the drum unit.

2. Remove the charge corona unit (Pg 5-16)
3 Remove the quenching lamp unit [A].
4. Remove the pressure spring [B] and bushing [C].
5. Slide the cleaning blade [D] to the left side and remove it from the right side.
NOTE: 1. Do not press the cleaning blade too strongly. Otherwise, the drum
unit may deform.
2. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure
[E] several times manually, and then hold down the cleaning blade
gently along its entire length to ensure that the cleaning blade
contacts the drum. Even if the drum is installed already, this action
[F] can be taken through the rear side from where the rear feed table
assembly is removed (follow steps 1 to 3 of the ozone filter
replacement).
3. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on the
edge of the cleaning blade.

SM 5-15 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[A] [B]

1. Remove the drum unit.

2. Remove the ground springs [A].
3. Remove the charge corona unit [B] (2 connectors).
NOTE: When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2
connectors (C for the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are set
properly.

A163 5-16 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT

[E]

[B]
[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]
1. Remove the charge corona unit.
2. Remove the 4 grid wires [A] (4 springs).
3. Remove the endblock covers [B].
4. Replace the corona wire [C] (1 spring).
NOTE: (1) Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight
slots [D], are all straight, and not crossed.
(2) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may
cause uneven charge on the drum.
(3) Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires.
(4) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,...
etc.) as this will damage the corona wire.
(5) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause
uneven charge on the drum.
(6) Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the right
endblock.

SM 5-17 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[B]

1. Remove the drum unit and place it as shown.

2. Remove the pressure spring [A] and pick-off pawl unit [B] (2 screws and 1
connector).
NOTE: When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press
too strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.

A163 5-18 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 2/7/96
4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

⇒ ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --940 ± 10V.

NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack is
replaced.
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the rear cover.
2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, and
connect the voltage terminal to TP2 on the charge/bias/grid power pack.
3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V.
4. Turn on the main switch.
5. Access SP mode and select No. --11.

6. Press the key to turn on the grid voltage.

7. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press
the key and then change the voltage using and
keys.

8. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.

SM 5-19 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: a) The drum currents vary with environmental conditions such as
humidity and atmospheric pressure. Generally it is not necessary to
adjust the drum currents because they have already been adjusted
for a wide range of environments at the factory.
b) Drum current adjustment is necessary whenever the power packs
are replaced: adjustment may also be necessary to correct problems
with paper separation, incomplete toner transfer, or image density.
c) Make sure that the main switch is turned off when you change the
range on the digital multimeter. If it is not, the multimeter may be
damaged.
d) There are variable resistors to change the charge currents, but they
should not be changed. The drum currents should be adjusted by
changing SP mode setting.

Preporation
1. Remove the developer unit.
2. Remove the drum unit.
3. Remove the OPC drum from the drum unit, and install the current
measurement drum [A] instead of the OPC drum.

[A]

A163 5-20 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Install the drum unit [B] on the machine.

[B]

CAUTION: Be careful not to turn on the main motor. If the main motor
accidentally turns on, some parts around the drum may be
damaged.

SM 5-21 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc--1000 ± 20 µA

WARNING: Make sure that the machine is unplugged before connecting
the multimeter on the charge/bias/grid power pack.
Pay extreme attention when connecting the multimeter. The
potential of the charge corona terminal becomes --5kV.

1. Connect all the terminals of the current measurement drum to the machine
ground.
2. Disconnect the charge corona terminal of the charge/bias/grid power pack.
3. Connect the multimeter as shown in the illustration.
4. Set the multimeter range at dc 2 mA.
5. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.
6. Access SP mode and select No. --10.

7. Press the key to turn on the charge corona.

8. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press
the key and then change the voltage using and
keys so that the charge current is dc --1000 ± 20 µA.

9. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.

A163 5-22 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD:
dc --100 ± 5 µA (Leading edge to 20 mm from the trailing edge)
dc --150 ± 5 µA (20 mm trailing edge)
1 Connect the multimeter as shown above.

2. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 µA.

3. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.
4. Access SP mode and select No. --12.

5. Press the key to turn on the transfer corona.

6. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the
voltage using and keys so that the transfer current is dc
--100 ± 5 µA.

7. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.
8. Select SP mode No. --13.

9. Press the key to turn on the transfer corona.

10. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the
voltage using and keys so that the transfer current is dc
--150 ± 5 µA.

11. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.

SM 5-23 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD:
ac 250 ± 10 µA (Normal Paper)
ac 350 ± 10 µA (Film and leading
edge of translucent paper)
dc --20 ± 2.5 µA
1. Connect the multimeter as shown above.
2. Set the multimeter range at ac 2 mA.
3. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.
4. Access SP mode and select No. --14.

5. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

6. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the current
using and keys so that the ac separation current is ac 250
± 10 µA.

7. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.
8. Select SP mode No. --15

9. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

10. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the current
using and keys so that the ac separation current is ac 350
± 10 µA.

11. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.

A163 5-24 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
12. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 µA.
13. Select SP mode No. --16.

14. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

15. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the current
using and keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20
± 2.5 µA.

16. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.
17. Select SP mode No. --17.

18. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

19. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the current
using and keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20
± 2.5 µA.

20. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.

SM 5-25 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. FUSING
5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL

[H] [I]

[H]

[E]
[F]

[B]
[C]

[D]

[F]
[A]

[B] [G]
1. Remove the copier rear cover.
2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends.
3. Disconnect the connector [C] and flex the hinge arms [D] of the exit cover
slightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove.
4. Turn the exit unit 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it by
pulling out.
NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [F] between the two
pulleys [G] and raise the left hinge [H] using tape [I].

A163 5-26 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [F] [E]
[G]

[C]

[D]

[C]

[B]

[A]

5. Disconnect the connectors [A].

6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket.
7. Remove the 2 screws [C].
8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], pull out the fusing
unit.
NOTE: While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], set the
fusing unit on the guides [E] and align the cuts [F] to the side plates
[G] at both ends when reinstalling the fusing unit.

SM 5-27 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B] [F]

[B]
[C]
[C]
[D]
[E]

[G] [J] [K]

[I]
[G]
[A]

[H]
[A] [J] [I]

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor when removing and
reinstalling the hot roller.
1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Remove the pressure springs [A].
3. Remove the fusing lamp brackets [B] and cushions [C] (1 screw each).
4. Remove the fusing lamp [D] from the left side as shown (1 connector [E], rear
view).
5. Remove the 2 C-rings [G], 1 gear [H], 2 bushings [I], and 2 bearings [J]).
6. Slide the hot roller [K] to the right side and remove it from the left side.

A163 5-28 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[H] [D] [G]

[C]

[E]
[B] [F] [A]

[I]

[I]
[J]

CAUTION: 1) Do not touch the hot roller or pressure roller while they
are hot.
2) Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor [A]
and pressure roller thermistor [B] when removing and
reinstalling the pressure roller.

1. Remove the hot roller.

2. Push the projection [C] of the fusing entrance guide stopper and remove the
fusing entrance guide [D].
3. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [E] (4 screws).
4. Lift up the pressure roller (access the pressure roller from the cut [F] of the
frame), slide out the pressure roller shaft [G] to the left, then remove the
pressure roller [H].
5. Replace the pressure roller (2 stoppers [I] and 1 shaft [J]).
NOTE: When reinstalling pressure roller, set the right pressure roller stopper
and push the pressure roller shaft to the right from the left, and set
the left pressure roller stopper [ ].

SM 5-29 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]
[B]

[C]

5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 5 of the fusing unit removal.
2. Remove the pressure roller thermistor [A] (1 screw).

5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 5 of the fusing unit removal.
2. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [B] (4 screws).

5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 4 of the fusing unit removal.
2. Remove the hot roller stripper unit [C] (2 screws).

A163 5-30 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]

[E] [D]
[E] [E]
[G]
[C]

[B]

[A]
[F] [G]

5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the fusing stay.
3. Disconnect the thermofuse connector [B] from the fusing lamp harness [C].
4. Remove the hot roller thermistor [D] (1 screw and 1 spring, 7 clamps [E]).

5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 3 of the hot roller thermistor replacement.
2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [F] (1 screw and 4 clamps [G]).

SM 5-31 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

[A]

[B]

Caution: When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly
start to drive the fusing section. Keep your hands away from
any mechanical and electrical components during this period.

This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced.

Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (155°C), Mode 2 (160°C), Mode 3 (165°C), Mode 4

(170°C), Mode 5 (180°C), Mode 6 (190°C), Mode 7 (196°C)
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the copier rear cover.
3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by the
harness.
4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A].
5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, and
wait for longer than 10 minutes.
6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at the
middle of the hot roller.
7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used
(use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature.
9. Reassemble the machine.

A163 5-32 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. T & S CORONA UNIT
6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL

[A]
[B]

[C]

[C]

[D]

1. Open the paper path section [A] and take out the T & S corona unit [B] (2
connectors [C]).
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it
down when reinstalling.
2) Remove the connector cover [D] (1screw) for connecting the 2
connectors.

SM 5-33 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE
REPLACEMENT

[B] [A]

[I]

[C]

[B]

[F]
[H]
[E]

[H] [D]

[G]
NOTE: (1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may
cause uneven charging of the drum.
(2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires.
(3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,
etc.) as this will damage the corona wire.
(4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause
uneven charging of the drum.

6.2.1 Preparation
1. Remove the T & S corona unit.
2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].

A163 5-34 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement
1. Remove the separation corona wire [C].
2. Hook the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the right endblock.
NOTE: Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the right
endblock.
3. Hook the other side of the separation corona wire on the spring hook [F]
(special tool: 54199653). While pushing the spring [G] in the direction of the
arrow, hook the separation corona wire on the spring.
4. Set the wire on the slots [H].

6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the transfer corona wire [I].
2. Install the new transfer corona wire.

SM 5-35 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. OTHERS
7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT

[H] [A]

[G]

[F]

[E]
[I]
[D]

[I]
[B]

[C]

NOTE: Take care not to damage the mylars [A] on the rear feed table.
1. Open the fusing exit cover [B] and exit unit [C].
2. Remove the copy tray [D].
3. Remove the rear feed table assembly [E] (2 screws and 1 connector).
4. Unhook the blower duct [F] and remove.
5. Unhook the fan support plate [G] and remove.
6. Replace the ozone filter [H].
NOTE: When reinstalling the rear feed table assembly, fix the 2 screws [I]
while pushing the assembly.

A163 5-36 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION

[C]

[A]

[B]
[C]

1. Remove the rear cover of the machine (2 screws).

2. Remove the T&S corona unit.
3. Install the anticondensation heater [A] (3 screws).
4. Put the harness of the heater into the cutout [B] of the frame.
5. Connect the connector of the heater [C] with the one beside the ac drive
board.

SM 5-37 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
8. COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT
-- General Information --

Image density is affected by the following factors:

(1) Light Intensity
(2) Bias Voltage
(3) Toner Density
(4) Grid Voltage
(5) Charge Corona Current
The items listed above must be kept in balance to maintain correct image density.
In the field, image density should be adjusted first by changing the light
intensity. (Adjust the light sensor voltage.) If results are unsatisfactory, the
bias voltage can be changed. Also, if requested by the customer, the
overall image density can be changed by changing the toner density.
Normally, this should be kept at the normal position (factory setting).
The grid voltage and charge corona current are carefully adjusted at the factory.
Any adjustment out of the adjustment standards will result in over toning, toner
scattering, dirty background, or light image density problems. The grid voltage
and charge corona current adjustment should be done only when replacing the
Charge/Bias/Grid power pack, or to correct certain problems with image density
after checking all other possible causes.

NOTE: Adjusting grid voltage will not affect toner supply amount, but will
affect the amount of charge reaching the drum. Exposing the the
drum to light will not disipate all residual voltage resulting in
overtoning and background.

A163 5-38 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT

1. Every Call
When: 2. When replacing the following part
• Exposure lamp • Light sensor
• Drum • RAM on the main board
Purpose: To maintain the correct light intensity.
Level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale on the OS-A1 chart
Adjustment
should be slightly visible when the 4th manual image density
Standard:
level is selected.
Perform: Change SP #-6 setting.
How: Change the light sensor voltage.

1. Turn off the main switch.

2. Clean the following parts:

Item No. Section Method

Optics (Exposure glass, fiber Damp cotton and dry soft
(1)
optics array) cloth
Corona wires (charge, transfer and Dry cloth
(2)
separation) and casing.
(3) PTL Dry cloth or blower brush

3. Remove the middle right cover.

4. Make several copies at manual image density level 4 with OS-A1 chart.
5. Confirm that level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale is slightly visible on the
copy. If the copy image density is not correct, proceed with the following step.
6. Change SP #-6 setting in the SP mode.
If the image density is too dark: Increase SP #-6 setting.
If the image density is too light: Decrease SP #-6 setting.
7. Confirm that image density is within the adjustment standard.

SM 5-39 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT

1. The image is blurred even though the image density in

black solid areas is acceptable.
When: 2. Dirty background, where the problem is not caused by
excess toner and cannot be solved by adjusting the light
sensor voltage.
Purpose: To improve the copy image.
Perform: SP #-20
Change the development bias voltage for image density
How:
control by SP #-20.

SP #-20 3 Standard
0←3→8
Darker Lighter

1. Make a copy after adjusting the light intensity.

2. If the image is blurred:
Decrease bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity.

If the background is dirty:

Increase bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity.

A163 5-40 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT

Customer wants to change the overall image density of the

When:
copies.
Purpose: To change toner concentration inside development unit.
Perform: SP #-22
How: Change the toner density setting by SP #-22

NOTE: The toner density can also be adjusted using SP #-30 (toner density
sensor voltage setting). To return SP #-30 to the initial value, take memo
when the value is changed.

8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

When: Registration is not within the adjustment standard.

Purpose: To maintain proper registration.
Adjustment 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12")
Standard:
Perform: SP #-5
How: Change the registration roller start timing by SP #-5.

1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check the
registration.
2. Adjust the registration using SP #-5 if the registration is not within the
adjustment standard.

SM 5-41 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING
1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY
Is the used paper moist or extremely dry?
No Yes
Replace the paper.

Is the toner sensor voltage within the no toner supply level (level 0) ?
(Refer to Page 2-16.)
Yes No

Is there sufficient toner in the cartridge?

Yes No
Replace the toner cartridge.

Is the toner supply clutch energized?

Yes No
Check the main board and the toner supply clutch.

Does the toner sensor voltage decrease in the special toner supply mode (SP#62)?
Yes No
Check the toner supply mechanism.
The amount of toner used exceeds the toner supply amount.
⇒Supply toner until the toner sensor voltage reaches the target value.

Is the solid black copy dark enough? (Make a solid black copy using SP#
--51.)
Yes No

Does the image density recover (without dirty background) after forcing supply of toner
using SP#62?
Yes No

Check the charge corona, transfer corona and development bias.

Check the toner sensor and main board.
Check the light sensor, FL regulator and main board.

SM 6-1 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE

Make a solid black copy using SP#--51. Is the image density even?
Yes No

Is the developer level in the development unit?

Yes No

Check and correct the machine level.

Clean the charge corona wire, grid wire, and transfer corona wire. Check if they are correctly
set
on the slots of the end blocks.
Clean the optics. If the problem is not fixed, replace the exposure lamp.

A163 6-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND

Clean the optics and check the copy image.

No good

Change the light sensor setting to a lighter position using SP#

--6.
No good

Is the bias voltage correct?

Yes No
Adjust the bias voltage.

Is the toner sensor voltage much lower than the threshold between level 0 and 1?
(Check using SP#--32 referring to Page 2-16.)
No Yes
Check the main board and toner supply clutch.

Is the image density of solid areas high?

No Yes
Check the toner sensor.

Make several blank copies. Is the background still dirty?

Yes No
Check the cleaning blade.

Are the grid voltage and the charge corona current correct?
Yes No
Adjust the grid voltage and/or the charge corona current.
Replace the drum.

SM 6-3 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND

Vertical line or band?

Yes No

Does the black line appear at 251 mm intervals?

No Yes
Clean or replace the drum.
If a black band appears 250 mm from the leading edge, turn the main switch off and on . If
the problem is not fixed, check the T& S corona leakage.*NOTE
Check the part of the following items that corresponds to the position of the vertical line or band.

• Charge corona wire

• Grid wires
• Light path (Exposure lamp, fiber optics array, exposure glass)
• Cleaning blade
• Development unit
• Drum
NOTE: If the separation corona leakage is detected, the separation corona will
be turned off. This condition will not be reset until the main switch is
turned off and on. If the separation corona does not turn on, a black
band appears 250 mm from the paper leading edge.

A163 6-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY

Is the used paper moist?

No Yes
Replace the paper.

Are the terminals of the charge corona unit and the T& S corona unit connected properly?
Yes No
Set the terminals properly.

Is the charge corona wire or the T & S corona wire broken?

No Yes
Replace the broken part.

Are the charge corona and transfer corona applied?

Yes No
Check the main board, charge/bias/grid power pack, and T & S power pack.

Does leakage occur in the T & S endblocks?

No Yes
Replace the defective parts.

Are the development drive gears broken?

No Yes
Replace the broken gears.
Check the drum drive mechanism.

SM 6-5 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1.6 PAPER CREASING

Is the used paper moist?

No Yes
Change the paper.

Is the paper feed direction the same as the paper fiber direction?
No Yes
Change the paper transport direction, if possible.(NOTE 1.)
Decrease the fusing temperature using SP mode #1 to #3.(NOTE 2.)

NOTE: 1. If there is rib shape creasing, the paper feed direction should be
the same as the paper fiber direction.
2. After decreasing the fusing temperature, check if the image is
completely fused on the paper.

A163 6-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION

When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator and service
call codes are displayed.
When the service call conditions E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, and E8 conditions occur,
for safety reason they cannot be cleared by turning the main switch off and on.
Accessing SP38 and changing the date from "1" to "0" must be done to clear
these service call conditions.

2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal

-Definition-

The light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds.

<Points to check>

Exposure lamp

Light sensor

FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -4)

Main board (CN106-A3, and CN104-B1, -B2, -A29 -A30)

2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 100 C within
4 minutes and 30 seconds after the main switch is turned on.

<Point to check>

Fusing thermofuse

Hot roller thermistor

AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4)

Main board (CN106-A2, A4, B12, B14, B15)

SM 6-7 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open
-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 50°C within
3 minutes after the main switch is turned on.

<Point to check>

Hot roller thermistor

AC drive board ( T202-2, RA201-T4)

Fusing thermofuse

Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

-Definition-

The resistance of the the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 KΩ.

<Point to check>

Hot roller thermistor

Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

-Definition-

The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 MΩ.

<Point to check>

Pressure roller thermistor

Main board (CN106-A2, -A4, -B12, -B14, -B15)

A163 6-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short
-Definition-

The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 KΩ.

<Point to check>

Pressure roller thermistor

Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor becomes higher than 250°C

<Point to check>

Hot roller thermistor

Fusing thermofuse

AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4)

Main board (CN106-A2, -B14, -B15)

SM 6-9 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error
-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach the target
ready temperature within 12 minutes after main switch is turned on.

<Point to check>

Hot roller thermistor

Fusing lamp

Fusing thermofuse

AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4)

Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

AC harness

2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

-Definition-

The toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts.
NOTE: This condition is not detected until 251 copies since initializing
developer.
<Point to check>

Toner density sensor

Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area

Main board (CN104-A10, -A11, -B20, -B21)

A163 6-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal
-Definition-

The main board does not receive a signal from the main motor for 2 seconds
while the main motor is on.

<Point to check>

Main motor

Mechanical interference of the main motor drive

Main board (CN106-A12, -A13)

2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error

-Definition-

The toner density sensor voltage cannot be adjusted to its standard value (4.1
±0.1 volts) during the new developer initialization.
NOTE: If clearing the SC condition, the previous data of SP#-30 is still used
until its next initialization.
<Point to check>

Toner density sensor

Developer

Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area

Main board (CN104-A10, -A11, -B20, -B21)

SM 6-11 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE
3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe version
Fuse
Specification Symptom
No.
FU1 250V 4A No power.
No indication.
FU2 250V 6.3A
Beeper sounds.
FU3 250V 6.3A E=10 is indicated.
FU4 250V 6.3A Not used.

USA version
Fuse
Specification Symptom
No.
FU1 125V 8A No power.
No indication.
FU2 250V 5A
Beeper sounds.
FU3 250V 5A E=10 is indicated.
FU4 250V 5A Not used.
FU5 125V 1A Counter No symptoms

A163 6-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ROLL FEEDER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. SPECIFICATIONS
Roll Paper Size: Width: 210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36"
Length: 150 meters
Diameter: Less than φ170 mm
Cut Size: --Preset Cut: 1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm,
420 mm, 297 mm
48", 36", 24", 18", 12"
46", 34", 22", 17", 11"
Up to 10 extra preset cut length can
be specified by SP23 ~ 32.
--Selected Length Cut: 245 mm to 2000 mm
(1 mm per step)
9.6" to 80" (0.1" per step)
Cutting Time: Within 0.80 second
Paper Transport Velocity: 50 mm/s
Repeat Quantity: 1 to 99
Control: Microprocessor
Power Source: +24 volts and +5 volts from the copier
Power Consumption: Maximum 110 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,080 mm x 475 mm x 295 mm
42.71" x 18.70" x 11.61"
Weight: 29 kg, 63.8 lb

SM 7-1 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE
LAYOUT

4
5
3
2
1

6
7

8 6

1. Paper Feed Motor 5. Paper Feed Rollers

2. Idle Pulley 6. Paper Roll Spool
3. Timing Belt 7. Paper Roll
4. Cutter Motor 8. Cutter Unit

A163 7-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of
the Point to Point (Water proof paper).
Name Function Index No.
Motors
Paper Feed Drives all mechanical components except the cutter unit 32
(DC Stepper Motor).
Cutter Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor). 39

Switches
Door Indicates "Door Open" on the operation panel and 38
disables the key operation.
Left Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at the left home 40
position.
Right Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at the right home 33
position.

Sensors
Paper End Detects when the roll paper runs out. 35
Leading Edge Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading edge of the 42
paper to start the paper length pulse count.
Humidity Detects humidity and turns on the RF antihumidity heaters 34
while copying is not being done (if the humidity is higher
than 45%).

Printed Circuit Board

RF Control Controls all roll cutter unit functions in accordance with 37
copier CPU.

Others
Upper RF Removes humidity from the roll paper 41
Antihumidity Heater
Lower RF Removes humidity from the roll paper 36
Antihumidity Heater

SM 7-3 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A163 7-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
4.1 BASIC OPERATION

[D]

[C]

[A]

[B]

The paper feed rollers [A], which are turned by the paper feed motor, feed paper
from the paper roll [B] through the cutter unit [C] to the paper leading edge
sensor [D] according to the signal from the copier. When the paper feed motor
starts, the copier CPU starts measuring the length of the paper. (The paper
length is measured by counting the number of steps as the paper feed motor
[stepper motor] turns.)

SM 7-5 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95

[C]

[B]

[A]

[D]

After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper is
directed to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotating
after the registration sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the copy paper. The
copy paper is fed to the registration roller and stops to wait for the original. At the
appropriate timing after the original registration sensor is activated by the original,
the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start to rotate. The copy paper
starts to be fed again. Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speed
of the roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge
of the copy paper. When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motor
stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motor
has stopped, the registration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. The
paper is cut during the time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled straight.
This allows for a neat cut.

When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 309 mm, the roll cutter unit
cuts the paper after the first rotation of the roll paper feed roller [D], as the paper
reaches the selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again.
After the registration roller stops rotating, the roll paper feed motor continues to
rotate and a paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. When the
selected cut length is between 309 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unit cuts the
paper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. The paper buckle
forms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, because the paper feed
roller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. The registration roller
brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration
rollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.

A163 7-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM

[B]

[A]

[D]
[C]

The gear [A] from the paper feed motor disengages from the cutter unit gears [B]
when the roll cutter unit is unlocked from the lower position and lifted up. At this
time, the cutter unit is locked at the upper position by the lock lever [C], and the
wheel [D] on the right side can be rotated manually to position the leading edge
of the roll paper.

SM 7-7 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.3 CUTTER OPERATION

[C]

[B] [C] [A]

The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixed
blade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paper
in both directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutter
unit. The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotary
cutting blade knob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.

A163 7-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 TEST POINTS
Function TP No.
GND TP903
VA (24 V) TP901
VC (5 V) TP902

5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION

Component Unit Symptom
F901 (250V/1.0A) RF Main board The AC line for the
R/F antihumidity
heaters is cut. The
heaters are not
turned on.

SM 7-9 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Roll Feeder (A571)

CAUTION: Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following
procedure.

Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Harness Cover ............................................................................ 2 pcs
Angle Bracket .............................................................................. 1 pc
Spacer ......................................................................................... 1 pc
Small Cap..................................................................................... 1 pc
Screws - M4x8 ............................................................................ 8 pcs
Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8 ............................................. 2 pcs

NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714) is
required.

A163 7-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]
[D]

[C]

[C] [C]

[H]
[G]
[E]

[H]

[B] [F]

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder is
being installed on the table and the copier.
NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent
the left and right covers from being damaged.
2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D].
3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each).
4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] to
the down position.

SM 7-11 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]

[E]

[D]
[C]
[B]

[F]

[G]

5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A]
(2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C],
toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws).
6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers.
7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).

A163 7-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]

[D] [B]

[C]

NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing the
bracket [A].
8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1
screw), bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and the
manual feed table [D].

[C]

SM 7-13 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]

[B]

[D]
[E]

[F]

9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on both
sides into the mounting rail [B]).
NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks.
10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws).
11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).

A163 7-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [A]

[H]
[I] [G]
[C]

[D]

[J]

[A]

[B]

[F]
[E]

NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until the
spring washers [A] are flattened.
12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside of
the table.
13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through the
holes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F])
14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board {2 connectors [G]
and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer)}.
15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac drive
board connector.
16. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each).
17. Reinstall Manual Feed Table
18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder right
cover.

SM 7-15 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [C] [B]

[A]

[E] [F] [D]

Length 300 PRG. 1100 PRG.

Temperature No. No.
NORMAL XX 42 XX 45
HIGH (VELLUM) XX 43 XX 46
LOW (FILM) XX 44 XX 47

18. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.
19. Press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Modes key [A]
+ key [B]
- key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
20. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds.
The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
21. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys.
Function Select key [E]
+ key
RF Select key [F].
22. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that is
attached to the right side plate.
23. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode.
24. Reattach the roll feeder right cover.
25. Check the roll feeder operation.

A163 7-16 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

7.1.1 Front Cover Removal

[A]

[C]

[C]
[B]

1. Remove the front cover [A] (2 screws).

NOTE: If the screw holes for the front cover become worn by the screws,
extra holes are provided next to the original screw holes.

7.1.2 Left and Right Cover

NOTE: Be careful not to drop and damage the lower front cover [B].
1. Remove the left and right covers [C and D] (3 screws each).
NOTE: When reattaching the left and/or right covers, unlock and lift the
cutter unit for easier assembly.

SM 7-17 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL

[C] [D]

[A]

[B]

[A]

1. Remove the roll feeder left and right covers.

2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the cutter unit.
3. Take out the cutter unit [B] (1 connector [C]).
NOTE: When reinstalling the cutter unit, attach the cutter unit cover [D] with
the cutter unit.

A163 7-18 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[A]

[B]

[C]

[I]

[H]

[D]
[E]

[H] [G] [E] [F]

1. Remove the cutter unit.

2. Unlock and lift the paper feed roller unit [A] using the release lever [B].
3. Remove the release lock lever [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the feed roller guide plate [C] (6 screws).
5. Replace the paper feed roller [D] (2 allen screws [E], 1 gear [F], 1 snap ring
[G], 2 bushings [H], and 1 retaining ring [I]).

SM 7-19 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSION
ADJUSTMENT

[A]

[B]

If the timing belt tension for the paper feed motor is not correct, the paper cut
length varies for each copy paper. Readjust the timing belt tension for the paper
feed if this occurs.
1. Remove the small cap [A] (2 screws).
2. Loosen the screw [B] and re-tighten it.

A163 7-20 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 5/95
7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed to
correct cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factory
without the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier on
which it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length as
follows:
NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying
because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its length
temporarily.

7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for length shorter than 420
mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm)

NOTE: There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperature
mode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type.
[Normal (SP#42, 45), High (SP#43, 46), Low (SP#44, 47)].
1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in the
preset cut mode.
2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample and
preset cut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference.
3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length is
within the adjustment standards.
Example: 1. Current SP data #42....0
Copy sample length = 297 -- 4
Set SP mode #42...4.0
2. Current SP data #42....0
Copy sample length = 297 -- 4
Set SP mode #42...+ 4.0
4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode and
check their length.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 if necessary.

SM 7-21 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT

[B] [A]

[C]
[E]

[E]

[D]

1. Mark a line [A] on the exposure glass [B].

2. Make 594 x 1189 mm copies from the roll feeder unit.
NOTE: 594 mm wide paper is easier to adjust than 841 mm wide paper.
3. Measure the lengths [C] and [D].
4. Loosen the 2 screws [E] which determine the paper spool height.
5. If C > D, lower the right side of the paper spool. If C < D, do the opposite.
6. Make another copy. Check the lengths [C] and [D].
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 if necessary.
NOTE: If the 10 or more copies are made continuously, the nip band width
of the fusing unit may change. For correct adjustment, do this
procedure at least 10 minutes after a continuous copy run of 10 or
more.

A163 7-22 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A251/A252
Service Manual

The A251/A252 machines are based on the A163 copier.

Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages.
Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the base
copier’s service manual. It should always be utilized together with the base
copier’s service manual.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................... 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 PAPER PATH ............................................................................................ 1-3
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT ................................................................... 1-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................ 1-6
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 1-7

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................ 2-1

2.1 DRUM ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE.............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 EXPOSURE............................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY) ............................................................ 2-2
2.4 DEVELOPMENT........................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL..................................................................................... 2-4
2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ...................................................................... 2-5
2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER) ...................................................................................... 2-5

3. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.4 POWER SOURCE ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ............................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 COPIER....................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.2 TABLE (A836) ........................................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10)............................................................................................. 3-14
3.2.4 ROLLER FEEDER (A571)......................................................................................... 3-18

4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 4-1

4.3 SERVICE TOOLS...................................................................................... 4-1
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ................................................................................ 4-9
4.4 JAM CODE LIST...................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE.................................................................................................... 4-11
4.6 SERVICE REMARKS .............................................................................. 4-15
4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD.................................................................................................. 4-15

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 5-1

5.2 OPTICS ..................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ...................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) .......................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ..................................................... 5-2
5.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL ................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY) ....................................................... 5-4
5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) .......................................... 5-5
5.4 DRUM UNIT............................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL.............................................................................................. 5-6

TOC i A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.5 FUSING ..................................................................................................... 5-7
5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL........................................................................................... 5-7
5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT................................................................................ 5-9
6.5.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT......................... 5-9
5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. 5-11
5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................. 5-11

6. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................. 6-1
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIION................................................................... 6-1
6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTION ABNORMAL ...................... 6-1
6.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL (U.S.A. VERSION ONLY) ................ 6-1
6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE .............................................................................. 6-2
6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT .............................................................................................. 6-2

A251/A252 ii TOC

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

  IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are supplied
with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.
7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning to
perform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanical
and electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium battery
which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only with
an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM
pack. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must be
handled in accordance with local regulations.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according to
local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not put
more than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 POSITION 1
A251/A252 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

TAB
A251/A252 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

POSITION 2
TAB
A251/A252 INSTALLATION

POSITION 3
TAB
A251/A252 SERVICE TABLES

POSITION 4
TAB
A251/A252 REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENT

POSITION 5
TAB
A251/A252 TROUBLESHOOTING

POSITION 6
TAB
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 A163, A251, A252, A174 COMPARISON CHART
THE FOLLOWING LIST DEFINES THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE A163, A251, A252 and A174 WIDE FORMAT COPIERS.

A163 A251 A252 A174

Configuration Table Top Table Top Table Top Console
Copy Speed 3 cpm 3 cpm 3 cpm 7.5 cpm
First Copy 24 seconds 24 seconds 30 seconds 18 seconds
Warm-up Time 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes
Multiple Copy No No 1 – 10 copies 1 – 10 copies
Paper Feed Manual Feed, (roll feed Manual Feed, (roll feed Manual Feed, (roll feed Manual Feed, 2 Roll Feeds
optional) optional) optional) (3rd roll feed optional)
Syncronized Cut Mode No Semi-auto synchro Cut Full Auto Synchro Cut Full Auto Synchro Cut

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fusing Lamp Ni-chrome Wire Lamp Ni-chrome Wire Lamp Ni-chrome Wire Lamp Halogen Lamp
Self Diagnostic Codes 11 codes, displayed in 13 codes, displayed in 13 codes, displayed in copy 18 codes, displayed in copy
copy counter copy counter counter counter
Mechanical Component Layout Same as A163 Similar to A163, different in Similar to A163
original feed area
Drive Layout 1 motor, 1 fan 1 motor, 1 fan 2 motors, 1 fan 7 motors, 2 vacuum, 1 fan
Drum Area A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Drum Drive A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Charge A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Charge Corona Circuit A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Auto. Charge Wire Cleaning No No No Yes
Exposure A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Exposure Lamp 140 V, 26 W 140 V, 26 W 140 V, 26 W 125 V, 37 W
Development A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Development Drive Main Motor Main Motor Main Motor Separate Dev. Motor
Manual Image Density (ID) 14 steps 14 steps 14 steps 26 steps
Auto Image Density Control No No No Yes
Toner Density Control A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Toner Supply A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Transfer and Separation A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Cleaning / Quenching A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Fusing and Paper Exit A163 A163 A163 Similar to A163
Fusing Drive A163 A163 A163 Separate Fusing Motor
Fans 1 Exhaust 1 Exhaust 1 Exhaust 2 Vacuum, 1 Exhaust
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 OVERALL INFORMATION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SPECIFICATIONS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

Information
Overall
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Table top
Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system
Original Feed: Sheet feed
Original Size: Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm
Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise
Copy Size: Same as “Original Size”
Copying Speed: 3 cpm (A1/D sideways)
First Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways): A251 copier
30 seconds (A1/D sideways): A252 copier
Warm-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23°C)
Multi-Copy: 1 to 1 only (A251 copier), 1 to 10 (A252 copier)
Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set to 1,
3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum
Drum Charge: Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio: 1 : 1 (±0.5%)
Exposure System: Slit exposure via fiber optic array
Exposure Lamp: Fluorescent lamp (26 W)
Development: Dual-component dry toner system
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption: 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)
Development Bias: Negative
Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection by induction sensor
Image Density Adjustment: Development bias control + exposure control
Paper Separation: Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls
Cleaning: Cleaning blade
Paper Feeding: Manual feed (roll feeder optional)
Image Fusing: Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and silicone
rubber (lower) rollers
Fusing Lamp: Nichrome wire lamp
(115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W)
Self-diagnostic Codes: 13 codes, displayed in copy counter

SM 1-1 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS

Power Source: 115 V/60 Hz ..... 15 A

220 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A
230 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A
240 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A
Power Consumption: Maximum: 1.4 kW
Warm-up: 1.2 kW
Ready: 0.04 to 1.2 kW
Copy cycle: 1.4 kW
Dimensions (W x D x H): A251: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm
42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1"
A252: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm
42.1" x 24.6" x 18.9"
Weight: A251: 79 kg, 174.0 lb
A252: 80 kg, 176.2 lb

Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration

Configuration
Additional equipment
Main frame Optional equipment
Roll feeder (A571-06, 07) Table (A714-05)
A251 copier Roll cutting rail (A570-06) —
Side guides (A569-06) —
Roll feeder (A571-06, 07) Table (A836-00)
A252 copier Copy tray (A836-10) Table (A836-00)
Side guide (A569-06) —

NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the A252 copier.

2) Key counter cannot be installed on these copiers.
Other Optional Equipment
• Paper Spool
• Drum anti-condensation heater
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

A251/A252 1-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PAPER PATH

1.2 PAPER PATH

Information
Overall
- A251 copier - - A252 copier -

E
F
A D
E D
A B

A252V500.PCX A252V504.WMF

A: Original Path (A251 copier)

B: Paper from the manual feed
C: Paper from the roller feed
D: Paper exit
E: Original Path from Rear Feeder
F: Original Path (A252 copier): Switching back

SM 1-3 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL COMPONENT

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT

21 22 23 24 25 1 2

20
19
4
18
17 5

16
6
15
7

10
14
11
13
12

A252V502.PCX

1. 1st Original Feed Roller 14. Roll Feeder

2. 1st Press Rollers 15. Paper Registration Rollers
3. Copy Tray 16. Development Unit
4. Exit Rollers 17. Toner Cartridge
5. Fusing Exit Rollers 18. Manual Feed Table
6. Hot Roller 19. Charge Corona Unit
7. Pressure Roller 20. 2nd Original Feed Roller
8. Gas Spring 21. Original Table
9. OPC Drum 22. 2nd Original Press Roller
10. T/S Corona Unit 23. Exposure Lamp
11. Main Drive Unit 24. Fiber Optic Array
12. Table 25. Cleaning Blade
13. Paper Spool

A251/A252 1-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL COMPONENT

Information
Overall
28 32 26
30
31

29

27

A252V505.WMF

26. Original Guide 30. Original Rear Roller

27. Rear Copy Tray (Option Copy Tray) 31. Original Entrance Press Roller
28. Original Feed Motor 32. Original Rear Press Roller
29. Original Entrance Roller

SM 1-5 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DRIVE LAYOUT

1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3

10

9 8 7
A252V503.WMF
- A252 copier only -
17
19

18
A252V501.WMF

1. Original Feed Roller Pulley 11. Hot Roller Drive Gear

2. Original Feed Roller One Way Pulley 12. Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear
3. Development Unit 13. Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear
4. Development Unit Relay Gear 14. Drum Drive Gear
5. Development Drive Chain 15. Original Feed Drive Pulley
6. Paper Registration Roller Clutch 16. Original Feed Drive Belt
7. Drum Drive Relay Gear 17. Original Feed Motor
8. Main Motor 18. Original Rear Roller Pulley
9. Fusing Drive Chain 19. Original Entrance Roller Pulley
10. Exit Unit Drive Belt

A251/A252 1-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Information
Overall
Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point
(Water proof paper) index numbers.

Name Function Index. No.

Motors
Main Drives all mechanical components except the
original feed section (A252only) and the fans. (DC 32
Motor)
Exhaust Fan Removes the ozone built up around the drum
5
section to the ozone filter. (DC Motor)
Original Feed Drives the original feed section. (DC motor)
45
(A252 only)

Magnetic Clutches
Registration Drives the registration rollers. 30
Toner Supply Turns on to supply toner to the development unit. 31

Solenoids
Pick-off Pawl Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum. 6

Switches
Main Supplies power to the copier. 17
Original & Paper Cuts AC power when the original or paper feed
18
Feed Safety unit is opened.
Fusing Exit Safety Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit is
12
opened.

Sensors
Door Open Indicates “Door Open” in the operation panel and
29
prohibits the key operation.
Toner Density Detects the density of toner in the developer. 26
Original Registration Detects when the original lead edge passes at the
4
front of the exposure glass.
Light Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp output. 27
Entrance Feed Detects when copy paper is inserted (jam
24
detector).
Registration Detects when copy paper arrives at the
25
registration rollers (jam detector).
Exit Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. 7
Original Entrance Detects the original length and the original jam. 43
(A252 only)
Original Rear Detects the original jam. 44
(A252 only)
Exit Cover Open Indicates “Door Open” in the operation panel and 47
prohibits the key operation.

SM 1-7 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Name Function Index. No.

Printed Circuit Boards
Main Controls all copier functions both directly and
22
through other PCBs.
PSU Converts the AC voltage to DC voltage. 21
AC Drive Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU. 15
FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. 23
Operation Panel Control the operation panel display. 10
Original Feed Drive Controls the rotation of the original feed motor.
46
(A252 only)

Lamps
Exposure Provides light to reflect the original’s image onto
2
the drum (fluorescent lamp).
Fusing Provides heat to the fusing unit. 3
Pre-Transfer (PTL) Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to
20
image transfer.
Quenching (QL) Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum
1
surface after cleaning.

Power Packs
Charge/Bias/ Provides high voltage power for the charge
19
Grid Power Pack corona, charge grid, and development bias.
Transfer/Separation Provides high voltage power for the transfer
16
corona and separation.

Thermistors
Hot Roller Monitors the hot roller’s surface temperature. 8
Pressure Roller Monitors the pressure roller’s surface
11
temperature.

Thermofuses
Fusing Protects against fusing overheat. 9

Heaters
Anticondensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier
13
(option).

Others
Total Counter Keeps track of the total length of copies made
28
(Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.).
Circuit Breaker Guards against voltage surges in the input power.
(Europe, Asia)/ 14
Fuse (U.S.A.)

A251/A252 1-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 DRUM

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 DRUM
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE

Descriptions
Detailed
[I] [A]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[F]

[E]

[B] - A252 copier only -

[C]
[K]
A252D502.WMF

[J]
A252D503.WMF

The OPC drum [A] is 80 millimeters in diameter and 970 millimeters long. It turns
constantly when the main motor [B] is on.
When the main motor turns on, the drive is transmitted to the drum as follows:
main motor drive gear [C] ⇒ idle gears [D] ⇒ drum drive gear [E] ⇒
drum flange [F] ⇒ drum
When the drum knob is tightened, the right flange presses firmly against the drum
so that the drum is held tightly between the flanges. The drum and flanges turn
together when the main motor is on. At this time, the drive is also transmitted to the
original feed rollers [G] through the original feed drive pulley [H] and belt [I] (A251
copier).
The original feed rollers [J] (original entrance and rear rollers) for the A252 copier
are driven by the original feed motor [K].

SM 2-1 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EXPOSURE

2.3 EXPOSURE
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY)

[D]

[J]

26 mm [K]
[B]
[C] [F]
[G] [H] [I]

15 mm

J: Original Rear Roller

K: Original Rear Sensor
[A]
[E]

A252D500.WMF
A252D501.WMF

In this machine (A252 copier), first, the leading edge [A] of the original is inserted
into the original table and the original is delivered to the appropriate start position.
Then the original is switched back while it is being scanned. Therefore, the original
is scanned from the trailing edge to the leading edge.
When an original is placed on the original table, it activates the original entrance
sensor [B]. The main motor starts rotating and the quenching lamp, development
bias, and PTL begin. Then, the exposure lamp turns on. To ensure correct original
feeding (especially for a thin original), the original is returned toward the operator
side (300 ms) before the original feed. Thus the original will be fed evenly by each
roller on the original entrance roller [C].
4 seconds after the original entrance sensor is activated, the original feed motor
starts rotating 200 mm/s to turn the original entrance rollers [C] and the original
rear rollers [J]. The original is delivered to the original feed start position [D]. The 4
second delay allows time for the operator to align the trailing edge (non-operator
side) against the first set of the rollers (to prevent skewing).

A251/A252 2-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EXPOSURE

When the original entrance sensor is turned off by the trailing edge [E] of the
original, the roll paper feed motor turns on and paper feeding starts.
When the trailing edge of the original reaches the original feed start position (26
mm ahead of the original registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops to
wait for the copy paper.
The registration clutch is activated after paper feed begins. The copy paper is fed
to the registration roller [G] and the registration clutch turns off when the copy

Descriptions
paper reaches 15 mm ahead of the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is applied

Detailed
to the charge corona.
At the appropriate time the original feed motor rotates 50 mm/s in opposite
direction and the original is delivered to the exposure glass. The registration clutch
and roll paper feed motor turn on again after the trailing edge of the original passes
the original entrance sensor. The paper feed resumes and the copy paper is
transported to the drum [I].
To measure the original length for synchro-cutting, the copier CPU measures the
time from when the original registration sensor detects the leading edge of the
original until the original entrance sensor detects the trailing edge of the original
(delivering the original to appropriate start position). The copy paper length is
measured by counting the number of steps as the roll paper feed motor (stepper
motor) turns. Just before the cut length of the copy paper is fed, the speed of the
roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the
copy paper. When the copy paper is fed out to the appropriate length, the roll
paper feed motor stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper.
When making duplicate copies, at the appropriate time after the trailing edge of the
original passes at the original registration sensor, the rotation of the original feed
motor changes in the opposite direction and the speed of the original feed motor
changes to 200 mm/s. The roll paper feed motor starts again. The original is
delivered to the original feed start position and roll paper feed starts again. The
above process is repeated. After all the duplicates have been made, the original is
stopped and caught by the original entrance roller (original hold mode: SP16). If
the original hold mode is canceled by SP16, the original is fed out without being
caught in the original entrance roller. During this procedure the original rear sensor
[K] determines the end of the original.
When the original hold mode is selected, the original is fed out when the $ key is
pressed.

SM 2-3 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DEVELOPMENT

2.4 DEVELOPMENT
2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
Recovery from Toner End Condition
After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), the
main motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During this period, toner
is supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3. Then, the main
motor rotates the development unit for another 30 seconds. Then copies can be
made.
If the TS level does not reach 3 after rotation of the development unit, the CPU
stops the machine and displays the toner end condition. This prevents the operator
from resetting the toner end condition by simply opening and closing original feed
unit.

A251/A252 2-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER)
The copy paper is delivered to the lower paper exit.
The location of the fusing exit sensor is different from the A163 and A251 copier.
Except for this difference, the A252 copier is identical to the with A251 and A163

Descriptions
Detailed
copiers. Please refer to A163 copier service manual for details.

SM 2-5 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSTALLATION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 15°C to 30°C (59°F to 86°F)
2. Humidity Range: 20% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct
sunlight).
4. Ventilation: Minimum space 20 m3

Installation
Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person.
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)
6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as
follows:
a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to
high, or vice versa.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in
the summer.
c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater
in the winter.
7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases.
8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.
9. Place the machine on a strong and level base.
10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strong
vibration.

SM 3-1 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Back 600 mm

Left Right
600 mm 600 mm

Back 1,000 mm

A252I505.WMF

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)

2. Back: 600 mm (24 in)
3. Right: 600 mm (24 in)
4. Left: 600 mm (24 in)

3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenter’s level.

A251/A252 3-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.4 POWER SOURCE

1. Input Voltage Level: 120 V, 60 Hz
More than 15 A (for U.S.A. version)

220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz

More than 7 A (for European version)
2. Permissible Voltage ±10%
Fluctuation:
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.

NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

Installation
2) Avoid multi-wiring.

SM 3-3 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.1 COPIER
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
- A252 copier -
Original Guide ......................................................................... 6 pcs
Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc

- A251 copier -
Guide Wire .............................................................................. 2 pcs
Copy Tray ............................................................................... 1 pc
Copy Guide ............................................................................. 1 pc
Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc

A251/A252 3-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D] [B]

Installation
[E]
[E]

[C]

[A]
A252I500.WMF

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is being
installed on the table.
2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the table
holes [E]).

WARNING
The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.

SM 3-5 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

[G]

A252I501.WMF

[C]

A252I510.WMF
[E]
[D]

[F]

[E] A252I502.WMF

3. Open the paper path section [A].

4. Remove the right upper cover [B] (2 screws).
5. Remove the drum protection sheet [C] and remove the screw [D] to apply
cleaning blade pressure to the drum.
6. Open the fusing exit section. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [E] and
protection sheet [F].
7. Remove two strips of shipping tape [G]. (Close the paper path section and
fusing exit section.)

A251/A252 3-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[A]
A252I511.WMF

Installation
[F]

[D]

[C]

A252I503.WMF

[E]
A252I504.WMF

8. Remove two shipping cushions [A].

9. Open the original feed unit [B], manual feed table [C], and toner supply cover
[D]. Remove a sheet [E] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the
developer [F] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown.
NOTE: Close the paper path section while opening the toner supply cover.
Otherwise, the toner supply cover will drop.
10. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.

SM 3-7 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[C]

[D] [B] [E] A252I508.WMF

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60°C when the main switch is turned
on, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary to access the
SP mode to load the total 2kg of developer (Steps 11 to 14).
Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer is
loaded from the development entrance. Then, pour in another kg of
developer.
11. Press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Mode key [A]
+ key [B]
+ key
Clear/Stop key [C]
12. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench and
toner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode).
13. Select 23 using the + key and – key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. The
main motor will rotate.
14. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded
from the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into the
development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the Clear
Modes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

A251/A252 3-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[D]

Installation
[E] [C] [B] [F] A252I508.WMF

15. Press the following keys on the operation panel:

Clear key [A]
+ key [B]
– key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
16. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end
and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
17. Select 36 using the + and – keys. Enter “1” by pressing the following keys.
Function Select key [E]
+ key
RF Select key [F]
Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operating
mode from SP mode.

SM 3-9 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

[C]

A252I507.WMF

18. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown.

19. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until it
stops.

A251/A252 3-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]
[B]

[D]
A252I506.WMF

[C]

Installation
A252I509.WMF

A252 copier only (step 20)

20. Install the original guides [A].

A251 copier only (step 21 and 22)

21. Attach the guide wires [B] to the copy tray [C].
22. Install the copy tray [C] and copy guide [D].

23. Reinstall all the covers.

24. Check the copy quality and copier operation.

SM 3-11 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.2 TABLE (A836)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Top Plate ............................................................................... 1
Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1
Right Side Plate ..................................................................... 1
Middle Plate ........................................................................... 1
Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1
Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ..................................... 14

A251/A252 3-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]
[G]
[A]
[C] [E]

[F]
[A]

A, B

[B]

Installation
[D] [A]
[I]

[J]
A836I501.WMF [A] [E]

[D]

[H]

[C]
A836I500.WMF

NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces around
the screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two components
meet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of the
left plate.
1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws).
2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A.
3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each).
NOTE: If the optional copy tray is installed after copier installation, install the front
copy tray stay [I] and rear copy tray stay [J] after step 3.
4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened.
5. Put the table the correction way up.

SM 3-13 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Front Copy Tray Stay.............................................................. 1
Rear Copy Tray Stay .............................................................. 1
Copy Tray Support.................................................................. 1
Copy Tray Guide..................................................................... 2
Copy Tray Sheet ..................................................................... 3
Nylon Clamp ........................................................................... 1
Rear Copy Tray....................................................................... 3
Copy Tray Stopper.................................................................. 2
Screw...................................................................................... 13
Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Short................................................. 2
Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Center .............................................. 1
NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the A252 copier. When the copy tray is
installed on the copier, the table (A836-00) is required.

A251/A252 3-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation
[B]

[A]
[C]
A836I501.WMF

[D]

A836I502.WMF

1. Install the front copy tray stay [A] and rear copy tray stay [B] (4 screws each).
NOTE: This step should be done during the table installation when the table and
the copy tray are installed at the same time. Refer to the table installation
procedure. If the copy tray is installed after the copier installation, remove
the roll feeder and copier from the table, then loosen the screws of the
table, then do step 1.
2. Install the copy tray guides [C] (1screw each).
3. Install the copy tray support [D] (2 truss screws).

SM 3-15 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C]

[A]

[D]
[C]
[A] [B]

A836I503.WMF
[F]

[G]

[E]

[E]
[D]

A836I504.WMF

4. Adhere the copy tray sheets with rubber [A] to the middle plate [B] of the table
so that the copy tray sheets are positioned between the screw holes [C] on the
rear copy tray stay [D] as shown in the illustration.
5. Hook the rear copy trays [E] onto the rear copy tray stay [D].
6. Secure the copier power supply cord [F] to prevent the cord from interfering
with the paper path (1 nylon clamp [G] and 1 screw).

A251/A252 3-16 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

[C]

Installation
A836I505.WMF

265 ± 5 mm [D] 265 ± 5 mm

[C]
A836I506.WMF

[A]

[B] [A] [B]

A836I508.WMF

7. Adhere the rear copy tray sheet - center (long) [A] and the two rear copy tray
sheets - short [B] onto the exit cover as shown.
8. Adhere the copy tray stoppers [C] to the front side of the table middle plate [D].

SM 3-17 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER (A571)

CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Harness Cover ....................................................................... 2 pcs
Angle Bracket ......................................................................... 1 pc
Spacer ................................................................................... 1 pc
Small Cap ............................................................................... 1 pc
Screws - M4 x 8 ..................................................................... 8 pcs
Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ...................................... 2 pcs
Washer (220 ~ 240 V versions only) ....................................... 2 pcs
Ground Plate (220 ~ 240 V versions only) .............................. 2 pcs
Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 for Ground Plate
(220 ~ 240 V versions only) .................................................... 2 pcs
NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714 or A836) is
required.

A251/A252 3-18 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

Installation
[A] A571I500.WMF
[C]

[C]

[H]
[G]
[C] A571I501.WMF

[E]

[H]

[B]
[F]

A571I502.WMF

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder is being
installed on the table and the copier.
NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent the
left and right covers from being damaged.
2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D].
3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each).
4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] to the
down position.

SM 3-19 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[E]

[D]
[C]
[B]
A571I503.WMF

[F]

A571I504.WMF

[G]

A571I505.WMF

5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A]
(2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C],
toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws).
6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers.
7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).

A251/A252 3-20 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

Installation
[B]
[D]
[C] A571I506.WMF

NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing the bracket
[A].
8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),
bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and the manual feed
table [D].

SM 3-21 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]
[F]
A571I507.WMF

[C] A571I508.WMF

9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on both
sides into the mounting rail [B]).
NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks.
10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws).
11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).

A251/A252 3-22 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[G] - A251 copier - [G]

[I]
[C]

[C] [N]

[D]
[L]
[H]
A571I512.WMF

[N] [K] [F] [A]

Installation
[A] [M]
[J]
A571I513.WMF [B]

[E]
A571I510.WMF

NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until the spring
washers [A] are flattened.
12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside of the
table.
13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through the
holes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F]).
NOTE: There are two versions of the ferrite core [N] for the roll feeder harness.
One is gray and the other is white. When installing the gray core version on
the A252 copier, unwind one loop, as shown.
For A252 copier
14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board and original feed
motor drive board [K] {2 connectors [G] and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with
spring washer)}.
For A251 copier
14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board {2 connectors [G] and
1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer)}.
15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac drive
board connector.
16. 220 ~ 240 V versions only
Install the ground plates [L, M] (1 screw with spring washer and 1 washer
each).
17. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each).
18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder right
cover.

SM 3-23 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[D]

[E] [C] [B] [F] A571I514.WMF

Length PRG. PRG.

300 1100
Temperature NO. NO.
NORMAL XX 42 XX 45
HIGH (VELLUM) XX 43 XX 46
LOW (FILM) XX 44 XX 47

19. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.
20. Press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Modes key [A]
+ key [B]
– key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
21. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds. The
roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
22. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter “1” by pressing the following keys.
Function Select key [E]
+ key
RF Select key [F].
23. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that is
attached to stuck on the right side plate.
24. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode.
25. Reattach the roll feeder right cover.
26. Check the roll feeder operation.

A251/A252 3-24 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TABLES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SERVICE TOOLS

4. SERVICE TABLES
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
All items except for the following are common with the A163 copier. Please refer to
the A163 copier service manual.

Service Program Mode Table

Mode No. Function Data
Paper Feed Out 0: 2 minutes
Refer to the A163 service manual for details.
Waiting Time 1:1 minute
The paper from the roll feeder is fed out only
*6 Setting 2: 2 minutes
when the roll feeder is attached to the A251
copier. 3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
Original Feed Out Select the time to when the original is 0: 2 minutes
Waiting Time automatically fed out after it has been set on 1:1 minute
Setting the original table in the manual feed mode. 2: 2 minutes

Service
*13

Tables
(A252 copier only) 3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: No auto feed out
Original Feed Start Selects the time to when the original feed 0: 1 second
Time Setting roller starts rotating after the original 1: 2 seconds
entrance sensor or original rear sensor for 2: 3 seconds
*14 the rear feed is actuated (A252 copier only). 3: 4 seconds
4: 5 seconds
5: 6 seconds
6: 7 seconds
Auto Shut-off Time Determines the auto shut-off time. 1 ← 30 → 240
*15 Setting (120 V
machines only)
Original Hold After original scanning is finished, the 0: No
Mode original exit roller stops before completely 1: Original Hold mode
feeding out the original. This is to prevent

$
the original from dropping onto the floor after
*16
scanning.
The original is fed out when the key is
pressed or when the next original is inserted
A252 copier only).
Length Size Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor -1.0 (shorter) ← 0.0 →
Magnification (A252 copier only). 1.0 (longer)
*17
The setting can be changed by the key
operation.
Semi-synchro Cut Selects whether the roll paper cut key must 0: Pressing the roll
Original Scanning be pressed at the appropriate time when the paper cut key
Mode trailing edge of the original passes the Semi- 1: Inserting the original
*18 synchro cut mark, or whether the original again
must be inserted again after the original is
scanned and the length is measured (A251
copier only).

SM 4-1 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Synchro-cut Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro -25 (Shorter) ← 0 → 25
Length Adjustment cut mode (A251 copier). (Longer)
Adjusts the cut length in the synchro cut, 1 mm/step
*19
preset cut, and variable cut modes (A252
copier). The setting can be changed by a
key operation.
Fixed Paper Size “42.0” size is added to the following modes
Pattern Setting in the inch mode: Refer to the A163 copier
*22 manual and page 4-13 of this manual for
details.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, and 18
*33 Not Used
Semi-synchro-cut Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro -10 (Shorter) ← 0 → 10
48 Length Adjustment cut mode (A251 copier only). (Longer)
0.1 %/step
Main Motor Speed (Jam code numbers have been changed 0: Standard
Adjustment from those used in the A163 copier.) If the -9 ← 0→ 11
49 main motor speed is incorrect, rJ98 or rJ99
will be indicated when a long copy is made.
In these cases this adjustment is required.
Copy Number Determines the maximum copy number. The 0: 99 sheets (A251)
Limit Setting default settings for the A251 and A252 1: 10 sheets (A252)
copiers are different. 2: 20 sheets
3: 30 sheets
4: 40 sheets
56
5: 50 sheets
6: 60 sheets
7: 70 sheets
8: 80 sheets
9: 90 sheets
57 Not Used
Repeat Copy Determines the maximum copy length for 0: 1,200 mm/48 inch
Length Limit repeat copy (A252 copier only). 1: The maximum paper
58
Setting length determined by
SP55.
Machine Displays the total time (hours) of the dc = X,XXX
67 Operation Counter machine operation (total time of the motor
rotation).
Total Copy Length Displays the total copy length by feet. SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX
69 /Number Display
(Feet)
Developer Displays the total number of developer dnF = XX (total number
Initialization initializations (SP36). Also displays the of developer
Number Counter developer counter (SP77) at the last initializations)
developer initialization. Hde = XX,XXX
80
(developer
counter at the
last developer
initialization
Toner End Displays the total number of toner end dtE = XX
Number Counter conditions (dtE). Also, displays the toner Hdt = XX,XXX
81
counter (SP78) at the last toner end
condition (Hdt).

A251/A252 4-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Toner Near End Displays the total number of toner near end dtn = XX
Counter conditions (dtn). Also, displays the toner Hdt = XX,XXX
82
counter (SP78) at the last toner end
condition (Hdt).
83 Not Used
84 Not Used
Number of Displays the total number of originals in the Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam)
Misfeeds by paper length indicator and paper misfeeds J1 ∼ J8 (initial jam)
Location by location in the leading edge indicator. J10 ∼ J45 (original
jam)
85
J51 ∼ J72 (copy paper
jam)
J80 ∼ J99 (roll feeder
paper jam)
Number of Service Displays the total number of service calls Et = X,XXX (total SCs)
Call by Location (SC) in the paper length indicator and SC E1 ∼ E15 (each SC)
90
codes by location in the leading edge
indicator.
Service Call Displays the last five service calls one after E1 = XX (The last SC
Records the other. code)
E2 = XX (1 before the

Service
Tables
last SC code)
E3 = XX (2 before the
91 last SC code
E4 = XX (3 before the
last SC code
E5 = XX (4 before the
last SC code
Beeper (XX = SC code)
92 Not Used
93 Not Used

SM 4-3 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

RAM Clear Clears selected data items from the RAM. 0: Not Used
To clear the memory, input the number of 1: Machine Operation
the item you want to delete, then press the (The memory for
key. SP67)
Note: If all the memory is cleared (if a 2: Copy Length Counter
number from 20 to 28 is selected), (SP69 to 75)
reinput the factory settings that are 3: OPC Counter (SP76)
shown on the decal attached inside 4: Developer Counter
(*Note1)
the upper right cover. (SP77) /
Please refer to page 4-14 for the Developer
default settings for each destination. Initialization Number
(When No. 10 to 26 is selected.) (SP80)
5: Toner Counter (SP78)
-1
/Toner End Number
(SP81)/Toner Near
End Number (SP82)
6: Counter for toner
(*Note2)
density step.
7: Clear data No.1 to 9
and 53.
8: SC Counter
(SP90 to 91)
9: Jam Counter
(SP85 to 86)
10: Change the settings
to the Japan version

*Note1:
This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163
manual).

*Note2:
For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after the
developer initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 and
after 150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

A251/A252 4-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

11: Change the settings
to the U.S.A. version
12: Change the settings
to the Europe
version
13: Change the settings
to the Asia version
14: Charge the settings
to the Hoechst
version
15: Change the settings
to the Regma
version
16: Change the settings
to the K+E version
17: Factory use
18: Not Used
19: Not Used
20: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings

Service
to the Japanese

Tables
version
21: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the U.S.A. version
-1
22: Clear all the
memory and change
the settings to the
Europe version
23: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the Asia version
24: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the Hoechst
version
25: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the Regma
version
26: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the K+E version
27: Factory use
28: Not Used
29: Not Used
30: Clear all the
memory

SM 4-5 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Total Counter Unit Selects the unit in which the total counter 0: 1 yard
Setting counts up by. 1: 1 m
2: 100 inches
-2 3: 50 inches
4: A1 length (594 mm)
5: Sheet (Any size)
6: 1 foot
Registration Adjusts the paper registration. 0: Standard
-5 Adjustment –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm
Advance Delay
Toner Supply Selects the periods for supplying toner after 0: 60 s
Periods in Toner clearing the toner end condition. 1: 70 s
-23
End Condition 2: 80 s
3: 90 s
Original Feed Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor -50 (Faster) ← 0 → 50
-24 Motor Speed (A252 copier only). (Slower)
Adjustment 0.025 %/step
-27 Factory Use Only
Length Size The fusing roller’s speed is slightly higher -100 ← 10 → 100
Magnification than the drum speed. (Shorter) (Longer)
Compensation on The speed of the copy paper transport will –2.5% +2.5%
Leading Edge slightly increase after the leading edge of
-28
the copy paper enters the fusing unit.
To compensate for this, the speed of the
original feed motor is corrected from the
leading edge to 183 mm (A252 copier only).
Registration Adjust the paper registration for the rear 0: Standard
Adjustment for the original feed (A252 only). –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm
Rear Feed If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this setting is Advance Delay
-29 used for the paper registration for the front
original feed as well as the rear original
feed. In this case, this adjustment is added
to the SP#-5 adjustment.
Synchro-cut Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro -9.9 ← 0 → 9.9
Length Auto Cut mode at 297 mm (standard length). 1 step = 0.1 mm
Adjustment Insert the 297 mm length original five times
(297 mm) (this number displayed on the copy number
indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If the
actual original length is different from the
standard length, input the following value in
-35 the cut length indicator before inserting the
original:

Actual Length - Standard Length

Then the machine automatically calculates

the correction value. The data is overwritten
on SP#-38.

A251/A252 4-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Synchro-cut Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro -50 ← 0 → 50
Length Auto Cut mode at 1189 mm. 1 step = 0.1 mm
Adjustment Insert the 1189 mm length original five times
(1,189 mm) (this number displayed on the copy number
indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If the
actual original length is different from the
standard length, input the following value in
-36 the cut length indicator before inserting the
original:

Actual Length - Standard Length

Then the machine automatically calculates

the correction value. The data is overwritten
on SP#-39.
-37 Not Used
Synchro-cut Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 297 -9.9 ← 0 → 9.9
Length Manual mm original is used. Increasing the number 1 step = 0.1 mm
-38 Adjustment will shorten the paper cut length. (This value is over
(297 mm) written when SP#-35 is
performed.)

Service
Tables
Synchro-cut Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 1,189 -50.0 ← 0 → 50
Length Manual mm original is used. Increasing the number 1 step = 0.1 mm
-39 Adjustment will shorten the paper cut length. (This value is over
(1,189 mm) written when SP#-36 is
performed.)
Light Sensor Displays the real time light sensor output Fd = X,XX
Voltage Display voltage. Fd = Light Sensor
(Factory use) In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and Voltage
the bias voltage for non-image areas can be
turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
-62
Translucent Film = OFF
Even if the SP mode is canceled, the
voltage is displayed during the stand-by
condition or copy cycling.
To release this condition, turn the main
switch off and on.
Synchro-cut Rear Normally, an original cannot be inserted 0: Normal
Feed Mode from the rear side in Synchro-cut mode. If 1 1: Synchro-cut Rear
is selected in this mode, an original can be Feed Mode
inserted from the rear side even if Synchro-
-70
cut mode is selected. This mode cannot be
used with the trailing edge margin function.
In this mode, the copy will be 194 mm longer
than the original (A252 copier only).

SM 4-7 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Cut Length In semi-synchro cut mode, the machine 0: Non-Length Display
Display Mode stores the 1st original cut length and 1: Length Display
displays it in the paper length counter. In this
case, the paper cut mode will be
automatically changed to the
Preset/Variable cut mode. It is not
necessary to press the cut key at the trailing
-71
edge of the original from the 2nd copy
paper.
Before the 2nd original is inserted in the
original table, the cut length in the cut length
counter can be changed with the “+”/“–”
keys within the range of the semi-synchro
cut (410 mm ~ 2,000, 16.5' ~ 80.0').
Original Feed Selects the speed of the original feed motor 0: 200 mm/s
-72 Motor Returning in returning original mode. A slower speed 1: 150 mm/s
Speed Setting may be effective for the thinner original. 2: 100 mm/s
Roll Feeder Start Selects the Roll Feeder start timing, just 0: Trailing edge is
Timing after the original entrance sensor detects the detected.
trailing edge of the original, or just after the 1: Original insertion
original entrance sensor detects the
insertion of the original.
The setting change from 0 to 1 makes the
first copy faster and 1 to 1 CPM increases. If
-73
the emergency stop key is pressed while the
original is being transported to the scanning
start position from the original insertion, it is
necessary to check for paper left between
the copier and roll feeder. Whichever setting
is selected, the first copy and 1 to 1 CPM
are within specification.
Original Transport Select whether the original is transported 0: Original is
Mode from the original table to the scanning start transported directly
position directly, or whether the original is to the start position.
returned to the scanning start position after 1: Original is returned to
the trailing edge of the original passes the start position after
through the original registration sensor the original passes
-74
(A252 copier only). through the original
The default setting (= 0) is effective for registration sensor.
usage of curled originals. If the setting is
changed from 0 to 1, perform the
synchro-cut length auto adjustment (SP#-35,
#-36).
Fusing Determines how the machine recovers when 0: No recovery
Temperature the fusing temperature becomes lower than (The machine simply
Recovery Setting the target value during repeat copy continues copying,
operation when selecting mode 8 (highest ignoring the fusing
temperature mode) (A252 copier only). temperature.)
1: Stops copying and
-75 feeds out the
original.
2: Stops copying but the
original is not fed out.
Copying starts again
after the fusing
temperature recovers.

A251/A252 4-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table
The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paper
length indicator (“ON” or “OFF” is displayed). If a program number not used is
selected, “NOT” is displayed.

Program No. Sensor/Switch/Signal

-1 Registration Sensor
-2 Exit Sensor
-3 Original Registration Sensor
-4 Entrance Sensor
Main Motor LOC Signal
-5
(Status is “ON” when the main motor is normally rotating.)
Door Switch
-6
(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)
-7 Original Entrance Sensor (A252 copier only)
-8 Original Rear Sensor (A252 copier only)
-9 Not Used

Service
Tables
-10 R/F Leading Edge Sensor
-11 Roll Feeder Door Switch
-12 Right Cutter Switch
-13 Left Cutter Switch
-14 Paper End Sensor
Exit Cover Open
-16
(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)

SM 4-9 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Output Check Mode Table

Press the Bypass Select key to turn on the selected electrical component. The
status of the component is displayed in the paper length indicator.
To turn off the component, press the Bypass Select key again.

Program No. Electrical Component Note

0 Main Motor
1 Toner Supply Clutch
2 Pick off solenoid
3 Registration Clutch
4 Total Counter
5 Pre-transfer Lamp
6 Quenching Lamp
7 Fusing Lamp
8 Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio)
9 Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)
10 Main Charge Corona
11 Grid Voltage
12 Transfer Charge Corona
13 Not Used
14 Separation Charge Corona
15 to 19 Not Used
20 Bias Voltage for the Image Area
21 Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area
22 Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage
Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for the
23
Non-image Area + Quenching Lamp
Original Feed Motor (Forward)
24
(A252 copier only)
Original Feed Motor (Reverse)
25
(A252 copier only)
26 Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters
27 Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note
28 Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor
Original Feed Motor Original feed motor
(Forward and Reverse) operation changes every
(A252 copier only) time the roll feed key is
pressed.
30
1st time: Forward
2nd time: Stop
3rd time: Reverse
4th time: Stop
34 Main Switch OFF (Energy Star) Turn off the main switch.

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutter
switches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in the
paper length indicator.

A251/A252 4-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JAM CODE LIST

4.4 JAM CODE LIST

4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE

Code Cause of Jam Remarks

dJ01 Initial misfeed at the original entrance sensor. A252 only
dJ02 Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor.
dJ03 Initial misfeed at the original rear sensor. A252 only
dJ05 Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor.
dJ06 Initial misfeed at the registration sensor.
dJ07 Initial misfeed at the exit sensor.
dJ08 Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the roll feeder.
Original entrance sensor OFF check during the original
dJ10 A252 only
scanning process.
Original entrance sensor ON check during the original
dJ11 A252 only
scanning process.
Original entrance sensor OFF check during the original
dJ17 A252 only
returning process.
Original entrance sensor ON check during the original

Service
Tables
dJ18 A252 only
returning process.
Original registration sensor leading edge ON check during
dJ21 A252 only
the original scanning process.
Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check during
dJ22 A252 only
the original scanning process.
Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check during
dJ23 A252 only
the original scanning process.
Original registration sensor leading edge OFF check during
dJ25 A252 only
the original returning process.
Original registration sensor leading edge ON check during
dJ26 A252 only
the original returning process.
Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check during
dJ27 A252 only
the original returning process.
Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check during
dJ28 A252 only
the original returning process.
Original rear sensor trailing edge OFF check during the
dJ32 A252 only
original scanning process.
Original rear sensor trailing edge ON check during the
dJ33 A252 only
original scanning process.
Original rear sensor leading edge OFF check during the
dJ35 A252 only
original returning process.
Original rear sensor leading edge ON check during the
dJ36 A252 only
original returning process.
dJ40 Emergency stop key pressed
Original registration sensor OFF condition during the original
dJ41 A252 only
scanning process.
Original rear sensor OFF condition during the original
dJ42 A252 only
returning process.
Original rear sensor ON condition when clearing the original
dJ43
hold mode by pressing the $ key.
A252 only

SM 4-11 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JAM CODE LIST

Code Cause of Jam Remarks

Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper is
dJ45
fed 2,500 mm.
Registration sensor OFF condition is detected just after
pJ51
starting the copy process.
Registration sensor OFF condition is detected before
pJ52 A251 only
starting the roll feeder again.
Entrance sensor ON condition is detected during roll
pJ53
feeding.
Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed
pJ55
2,500 mm.
pJ60 Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.
pJ61 Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.
pJ62 Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
pJ63 Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge.
pJ70 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.
pJ71 Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.
pJ72 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
rJ80 Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.
rJ81 Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.
rJ90 Paper cutter failure
rJ91 Door open during roll feeding
Roll feeder.
rJ95 Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm more than the
maximum paper length.
Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge
rJ98
during roll feeding.
Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge
rJ99
during roll feeding.

A251/A252 4-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JAM CODE LIST

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)

In mm Mode
0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297
1: 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245
2: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700,
600, 500, 400, 300, 245
3: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297,
245
4: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245
5: 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 245
6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 257
7: 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 245
8: 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 245
9: 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813,
788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 257
10: 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 245
11: 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 245
12: 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400,
1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700,

Service
Tables
650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245
13: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594,
550, 500, 420, 297, 245
14: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515,
420, 364, 297, 245
15: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 245
16: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 245
17: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 245
18: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 245
19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

In inch Mode
0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0
1: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
2: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
3: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
4: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
5: 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.6
6: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0,
9.6
7: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
8: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
9: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0,
17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
10: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5,
45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0,
9.6
11: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0,
36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6

SM 4-13 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JAM CODE LIST

12: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0,
36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
13: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0,
34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
14: 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0,
50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0,
20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6
15: 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.6
16: 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
17: 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0,
36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.6
18: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0,
20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.6
19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No. Japan U.S.A. Europe Asia Regma/Ozalid K+E
#1 1 2 2 2 2 2
#2 0 0 0 0 0 0
#3 1 1 1 1 1 1
#4 0 0 0 0 1 0
#5 2 2 2 2 2 2
#6 0 0 0 0 0 0
#7 0 0 0 0 0 0
#8 0 0 0 0 0 0
#9 0 0 0 0 0 0
#10 0 0 0 0 0 0
#13 0 0 0 0 0 0
#14 0 0 0 0 0 0
#15 30 30 — — — 30
#17 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
#19 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
#20 0 1 0 0 0 1
#21 0 0 0 0 0 0
#22 0 0 0 0 0 0
#-2 1 6 1 1 1 6
#-3 0 1 0 0 0 1

#13, #14, #17: A252 only

A251/A252 4-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD

Noise Filter

AC Drive Board

Service
TB202

Tables
TB201
A252M500.WMF

Service Remark for 220 ∼ 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive board
as shown correctly
1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on the
noise filter.
2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on the
noise filter.
3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3
on the noise filter.
4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal
4 on the noise filter
5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 on
ac drive board.
6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202
on ac drive board.

SM 4-15 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE REMARKS

AC Drive Board

TB202 TB201
A252M500.WMF

Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly
1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to
TB201 on ac drive board.
2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to
TB202 on ac drive board.

A251/A252 4-16 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 OPTICS

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.2 OPTICS
[C]
[A] [D]

[B]

[E]

A252R500.WMF

Replacement
Adjustment
[G]

[F]

A252R501.WMF

5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the left and right upper covers.

2. Remove the upper original guide [A].
3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feed
unit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (1 screw and 2 connectors).
4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends.
5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn and
remove.

SM 5-1 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTICS

[D] [C]
[B]
[G]

[F]

[H]

[B]
[C]
[E] [I]
[J]

A252R510.WMF [A]
[K]

A252R502.WMF

5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the original feed unit.
2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the exposure glass stoppers [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting up
the left side as shown.
NOTE: Make sure that the edge cut side [D] of the exposure glass is towards the
upper side when reassembling.

5.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the exposure glass.
2. Open the toner supply cover [E] and remove the front original guide plate [F] (1
screw).
3. Remove the rear original guide plate [G] (4 screws and 1 pin [H]).
4. Lift up the fiber optics array [I] and remove it from the left side by sliding it out to
the right side as shown.
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [J] of the
fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [K].

A251/A252 5-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTICS

5.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL

[B]
[A]

[A]

A252R511.WMF

1. Remove the fiber optics array.

Replacement
Adjustment
NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the
exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp.
2. Turn the exposure lamp [A] 1/4 of a turn and remove.
NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [B] of the exposure lamp is
towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).

SM 5-3 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTICS

5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)

[A]

A252R503.WMF

1. Follow the steps from 1 to 2 of the fiber optics array removal.

2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).

A251/A252 5-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTICS

5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY)

This adjustment should be carried out when the original registration and/or original
entrance sensor is replaced.
1. Measure the actual length of A3 (297) and A0 (1189) originals.
2. Access SP#-35 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 297 mm) and input the
difference between the measured length and 297 mm.
3. Press the “RF Select” key. The copy quantity indicator blinks. Input the test
copy number (default: 5).
4. Press the “RF Select” key.
5. Place the measured original (A3) on the original feed table. If the original is not
placed correctly (placed diagonally), by pressing the $ key once, this step
can be canceled only one time. Otherwise, carry out this procedure from the
beginning.
6. Repeat step 5 until the number in the blinking copy quantity indicator is “0”.
7. Press the “RF Select” key.
8. Access SP#-36 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 1,189 mm) and carry out
the adjustment in the same way as for the 297 mm adjustment.

Replacement
Adjustment

SM 5-5 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DRUM UNIT

5.4 DRUM UNIT

5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[B]

[B]
[A]

[F]

[E]
[C] [D]
A252R504.WMF

A252R505.WMF

1. Remove the development unit.

2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends.
3. Remove the timing belt [B] (A251 copier)/grounding plate spring [B] (A252
copier) and disconnect the harness connector [C].
4. Remove the drum unit [D].
5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor.
NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on the
pins [F] of the copier side plates.
2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.

A251/A252 5-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUSING

5.5 FUSING
5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL

[J] [K]
[H]

[G]
[I]

[C]

[D]
[B]

[F]

[A]

Replacement
Adjustment
[E]

[C]
[B]
A252R509.WMF

NOTE: Close the paper path section to remove and reinstall the fusing unit.
1. Remove the copier rear cover.
2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends.
Remove the screws [C] for the grounding wires.
3. Disconnect the connector [D], remove the screw [E], and flex the hinge arms [F]
of the exit cover slightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove.
4. Turn the exit unit [G] 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it by
pulling out.
NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [H] between the two
pulleys [I] and raise the left hinge [J] using tape [K].

SM 5-7 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUSING

[B]

[A]
[G] [F] [H]

A252R507.WMF

[C]

[E]

[C] A252R508.WMF

[D]

A252R506.WMF

5. Disconnect the connectors [A].

6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket.
7. 220 ~ 240 V version only:
Remove the 2 screws [C] and bronze plate [D] (2 screws).
8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [E], pull out the fusing
unit.
NOTE: When reinstalling the fusing unit, press down the fusing pressure release
bar [E], set the fusing unit on the guides [F] and align the cuts [G] to the
side plates [H] at both ends.

A251/A252 5-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 T & S CORONA UNIT

5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT

5.6.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE
REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]

[H] [C]

[B]

[G]
[E]

[F] [G]

Replacement
Adjustment
[D]

A252R512.WMF

NOTE: 1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may
cause uneven charging of the drum.
2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires.
3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper, etc.)
as this will damage the corona wire.
4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven
charging of the drum.

Preparation
1. Remove the T & S corona unit.
2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].

SM 5-9 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 T & S CORONA UNIT

Separation Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the separation corona wire [C].
2. Hook one end of the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the right
endblock.
3. Hook the center part of the separation corona wire on the spring [E] of the left
endblock.
4. Set the wire on the slots [F].
5. While pushing the spring in the direction of the arrow, hook the other end [G] of
the separation corona wire on the terminal of the right endblock.
6. Make sure the wire is set on the slots [F].

Transfer Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the transfer corona wire [H].
2. Install the new transfer corona wire.

A251/A252 5-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
When: Registration is not within the adjustment standard.
Purpose: To maintain proper registration.
Adjustment 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12")
Standard:
Perform: SP#-5, SP#-27 (A252 rear original feed)
How: Change the registration roller start timing by SP#-5 and/or SP#-27

1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check the
registration.
2. Adjust the registration using SP#-5 and/or SP#-27 if the registration is not
within the adjustment standard.

Replacement
Adjustment

SM 5-11 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SERVICE CALL CONDITION

6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITION
The following service conditions are newly added as the A251 and A252 copiers.
For other SC conditions, refer to the A163 copier for details. To clear SC E-15,
access SP38 and change the data from “1” to “0”.

6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTION

ABNORMAL
- Definition -
The zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second after the main switch is
turned on.

- Points to check -
• Main board
• AC Drive board

6.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL

(U.S.A. VERSION ONLY)
- Definition -

shooting
Trouble-
The main switch does not turn off within 0.45 second after sending reset signal.

- Points to check -
• Main switch
• Main board

SM 6-1 A251/A252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe Version
Fuse No. Specification Symptom
FU301 250 V 5A No power.
FU302 250 V 6.3 A Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy.
FU303 250 V 6.3 A No indication. Beeper sound.
FU304 250 V 6.3 A E = 10 is indicated.

U.S.A. Version
Fuse No. Specification Symptom
FU301 125 V 8A No power.
FU302 125 V 6.3 A Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy.
FU303 125 V 6.3 A No indication. Beeper sound.
FU304 125 V 6.3 A E = 10 is indicated.

AC Drive Board
Fuse No. Specification Symptom
250 V 15 A No power.
FU201
(U.S.A. version only)
250 V 8 A No power.
CB201
(Europe version only)

A251/A252 6-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B047/B048
SERVICE MANUAL
– Insert Version –

The B047/B048 machines are based on the A163/A251/A252 copiers.

Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages.
Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the base
copier’s service manual. It should always be utilized together with the base
copier’s service manual.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSERTION PROCEDURE OF SERVICE MANUAL
1. Replace the book spine tag with the new one.
2. Insert the B047/B048 service manual after the A163/A251/A252 manual.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 B047/B048
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This manual describes new items for the J2SS-C3 (B047/B048).
Please refer to the J2SS Mark II (A251/A252) manual for the descriptions marked
with “*” in page column.

OVERALL INFORMATION
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................1-1
1.2 PAPER PATH............................................................................................1-3
1.3 DRUM PROCESSES ............................................................................... *
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................1-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................................... *
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..................................................................1-6

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 2-1
2.1 DRUM....................................................................................................... *
2.1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................... *
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE .................................................................................. *
2.2 CHARGE .................................................................................................. *
2.2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT ......................................................... *
2.2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION ....................................................... *
2.3 EXPOSURE...............................................................................................2-1
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)..................................2-1
Basic Operation (Manual Feed) ........................................................... *
Original Jam Check Timing.................................................................. *
Drive Mechanism ................................................................................. *
Original Positioning ...............................................................................2-1
Scanning...............................................................................................2-2
Start Key Enable ...................................................................................2-3
2.3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL........................................................... *
2.3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL................................................................... *
Manual ID Control................................................................................ *
2.4 DEVELOPMENT .......................................................................................2-4
2.4.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... *
2.4.3 CROSS-MIXING .............................................................................. *
2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ..........................................................2-4
Toner Near End Condition ................................................................... *

SM i B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Recovery from Toner End Condition.....................................................2-5
Toner Density Sensor .......................................................................... *
2.4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS .................................................................... *
Basic Concept...................................................................................... *
Manual Image Density Bias ................................................................. *
2.4.6 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................. *
2.5 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................... *
2.5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL) ........................................................ *
2.5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER......................................................................... *
2.5.3 PAPER SEPARATION .................................................................... *
2.5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM ................................................................. *
2.5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT................................................................... *
2.6 CLEANING ............................................................................................... *
2.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION ..........................................................2-6
2.7 QUENCHING............................................................................................ *
2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ......................................................................2-7
2.8.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-7
2.8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... *
Fusing Unit Drive ................................................................................. *
2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ............................................................2-8
Fusing Circuit Operation ...................................................................... *
Overheat Protection ............................................................................. *
Hot Roller Temperature Control............................................................2-8
2.8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................................... *
The Ready Condition ........................................................................... *
Fusing Unit Operating Modes .............................................................. *
2.8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION......................................................... *
2.8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT............................................ *
2.9 OTHERS .................................................................................................. *
2.9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL ..................................................................... *
2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES
(ALL THE DESTINATION) ......................................................................2-9

INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................3-2
3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................3-2
3.1.4 POWER SOURCE............................................................................3-3
3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................3-4
3.2.1 COPIER............................................................................................3-4
Accessory Check ..................................................................................3-4
B048 copier only (step 21) ..................................................................3-12
B047 copier only (step 22 and 23) ......................................................3-12

B047/B048 ii SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Both copiers (step 24 and 25).............................................................3-12
3.2.2 TABLE (B439) ................................................................................3-13
Accessory Check ................................................................................3-13
3.2.3 COPY tray (B440)...........................................................................3-15
Accessory Check ................................................................................3-15
3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 and 2 (B435/b436) ..............................................3-19
Accessory Check ................................................................................3-19
3.2.5 Roll Cutting Rail (B437) ..................................................................3-28

SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ........................................... *
4.1.1 PM TABLE....................................................................................... *
4.1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE ......................................................... *
4.2 SERVICE TABLES ................................................................................... *
4.2.1 TEST POINTS ................................................................................. *
Main Board .......................................................................................... *
Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. *
4.2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS ................................................................. *
Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. *
T&S Power Pack.................................................................................. *
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS......................................................................................4-1
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...........................................................4-1
Service Program Mode Access Procedure .......................................... *
Service Program Mode Table ...............................................................4-1
4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ....................................................4-23
Input/Output Check Mode Access Procedure ...................................... *
Input Check Mode Table.....................................................................4-23
Output Check Mode Table ..................................................................4-23
4.3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE ........................................... *
4.4 JAM CODE LIST .....................................................................................4-25
4.4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE .................................................................. *
4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE.........................................................................4-25
Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)........................................4-27
Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1) ....................................4-28
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ..................................................... *
4.6 SERVICE REMARKS ..............................................................................4-29
4.6.1 DRUM UNIT .................................................................................... *
Drum .................................................................................................... *
4.6.2 CHARGE CORONA......................................................................... *
4.6.3 OPTICS ........................................................................................... *
4.6.4 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................. *
4.6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION..................................................... *
4.6.6 CLEANING UNIT ............................................................................. *
4.6.7 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................. *
4.6.8 ORIGINAL FEED ............................................................................. *

SM iii B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4.6.9 PAPER FEED.................................................................................. *
4.6.10 ROLL FEEDER.............................................................................. *
4.6.11 OTHERS........................................................................................ *
4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD .......................................................................4-29
Service Remark for 220 ~ 240 V Version............................................4-29
Service Remarks for 120 V Version ....................................................4-30

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 5-1
5.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ............................................................................... *
5.1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL ...................................................... *
Left Upper Cover ................................................................................. *
Left Lower Cover.................................................................................. *
5.1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL .................................................... *
Right Upper Cover ............................................................................... *
Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower
Rear Covers......................................................................................... *
5.1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL .............................................................. *
Rear Cover .......................................................................................... *
5.2 OPTICS .................................................................................................... *
5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)........................... *
5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)............................... *
5.2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ................................. *
5.2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY).......................... *
5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)............................ *
5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) ............... *
5.3 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................... *
5.3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................. *
5.3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL ................................................................ *
5.3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................ *
5.3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT ...................................................................... *
5.3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................... *
Bias Voltage for Image Area ................................................................ *
Bias Voltage for Non-image Area ........................................................ *
5.4 DRUM UNIT ..............................................................................................5-1
5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL ................................................................. *
5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT ...................................................................5-1
5.4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT.............................................. *
5.4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL............................................. *
5.4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT .................................. *
5.4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL ................................................. *
5.4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT..................................................... *
5.4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT .................................................. *
Charge Current Adjustment ................................................................. *
Transfer Current Adjustment................................................................ *
Separation Current Adjustment............................................................ *

B047/B048 iv SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.5 FUSING .....................................................................................................5-2
5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................... *
5.5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...................................................... *
5.5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT.......................................... *
5.5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ................. *
5.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.............. *
5.5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................... *
5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ..............................5-2
5.5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT ......................................5-2
5.5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT .......................................5-3
5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT .............................................................................. *
5.6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL ................................................... *
5.6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE
REPLACEMENT.............................................................................. *
Preparation .......................................................................................... *
Separation Corona Wire Replacement ................................................ *
Transfer Corona Wire Replacement .................................................... *
5.7 OTHERS .................................................................................................. *
5.7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT................................................... *
5.7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION.......................... *
5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................5-4
5.8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................... *
5.8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT........................................................... *
5.8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT................................................... *
5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT......................................................5-4

TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1
6.1 COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................. *
6.1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY ................................................................... *
6.1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE .................................................................. *
6.1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND ................................................................... *
6.1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND................................................................... *
6.1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY ............................................................... *
6.1.6 PAPER CREASING......................................................................... *
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................6-1
6.2.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................6-1
SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal .............................................6-1
SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open ..............................................6-1
SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open ...........................................6-1
SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short ...........................................6-2
SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open ..................................6-2
SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short ..................................6-2
SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat ............................................................6-2
SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error ...................................................6-3
SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal....................................6-3

SM v B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal...................................................6-3
SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error ......................6-3
SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal...............................................6-4
SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal........................6-4
SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal .................................................6-4
SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature .....................................6-4
SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light ....................................6-4
6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE ..............................................................................6-5
6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT....................................................................6-5
Europe Version .....................................................................................6-5
U.S.A. Version ......................................................................................6-5
AC Drive Board .....................................................................................6-5

ROLL FEEDER UNIT B435/B436

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 7-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................7-1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................7-2

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 7-3

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION .....................................................................7-3
2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION.........................................................................7-3
2.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION ...........................................................7-5
2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM........................................................................7-5
2.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION .....................................................................7-6

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 7-7

3.1 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT...............................................................7-7
3.2 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................7-8
3.3 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL...................................................................7-9
3.4 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................................7-10
3.5 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT ..................................................7-11
3.6 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT...................................................7-12
3.7 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT.................................................................7-13
Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: ±3 mm (for Length Shorter
than 420 mm) ±5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) ±11 mm
(3,000 mm) .........................................................................................7-13
3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ....................................................7-14

B047/B048 vi SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ! IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are supplied
with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.
7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning to
perform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanical
and electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according to
local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 POSITION 1
B047/B048 OVERALL INFORMATION

TAB
POSITION 2
B047/B048 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

TAB
POSITION 3
B047/B048 INSTALLATION

TAB
POSITION 4
B047/B048 SERVICE TABLES

TAB
B047/B048 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

POSITION 5
TAB
B047/B048 TROUBLESHOOTING

POSITION 6
TAB
POSITION 7

ROLL FEED UNIT B435/B436

TAB
POSITION 8
TAB

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Comparison of Major Specifications
Items FW740 FW750 FW760 FW870 FW770 FW780
A163 A251 A252 A174 B047 B048
Configuration Table Top Table Top Table Top Console Table Top Condole
Machine Life 60K Copies 60K Copies 60K Copies 300K Copies 60K Copies or 5 yrs 60K Copies or 5 yrs
(A1/D Sideways)
PM Cycle (A1/D 3.6K 3.6K 3.6K 10K 3.6K 3.6K
Original Size Max. A0/E Max. A0/E Max. A0/E Max. A0/E 36" X 118" 36" X 118"

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Original Length Max. 2m / 6.6ft. Max. 2m / 6.6ft. Max. 2m / 6.6ft. Max. 3.6m / 11.8ft. Max. 3m / 9.8ft. Max. 3m / 9.8ft.
Original Setting Face-up Face-up Face-down Face-up Face-down Face-down
Syncronized No Yes with Roll Feeder Yes with Roll Feeder Yes (Auto) Yes, only with Roll Yes, only with Roll
Cut (Manual) (Auto) Feeder Feeder
Process Speed 50mm/sec 50mm/sec 50mm/sec 90mm/sec 60mm/sec 60mm/sec
Copy Speed 3 cpm * 3 cpm * 3 cpm ** 7.5 cpm * 4 cpm 4 cpm
(A1/D) 2.4 cpm* 6 cpm **
Warm-up Time Less than 300 sec. Less than 300 sec. Less than 300 sec. Less than 360 sec. Within 3 min. Within 3 min.
(A1/D Sideways) (180 sec.) (180 sec.)
1st Copy Time 24 sec. 24 sec. 30 sec. 18 sec. 21 sec. 25 sec.
(A1/D Sideways)
Multiple Copy N/A N/A 1 to 10 (A0/E) N/A N/A 1 to 10
Paper Feed Manual Bypass Manual Bypass Manual Bypass 2 Roll Feeders + Manual Bypass Manual Bypass
(Standard) Manual Bypass
rd
Options * 1 Roll Feeder * 1 Roll Feeder * 1 Roll Feeder 3 Roll Feeder * Roll Feeder, 1 roll * Roll Feeder, 1 roll
* Roll Cutting Rail * Roll Cutting Rail * New Table * Roll Feeder, 2 rolls * Roll Feeder, 2 rolls *
* Table * Table * Copy Stacker * Roll Cutting Rail * Side Guide
* Table
* Side Guide
Dimensions 1080 x 570 x 1080 x 570 x 1080 x 803 x 1230 x 690 x 1080 x 570 x 1080 x 623 x
(W x D x H) 490 mm 490 mm 480 mm 1070 mm 490 mm 480 mm
Copier Only
Weight Copier 174 lb. 174 lb. 176 lb. 430 lb. 174 lbs 176 lbs
Only 79 Kg. 79 Kg. 80 Kg. 195 Kg 79 kg 80 kg
* Copy Speed 1 - 1
** Copy Speed 1 – 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 OVERALL INFORMATION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SPECIFICATIONS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

Information
Overall
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Table top
Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system
Original Feed: Sheet feed
Original Size: Maximum: 914 x 3,000 (36" x 118")mm
Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise
Copy Size: Same as “Original Size”
Copying Speed: 4 cpm (A1/D sideways)
First Copy: 21 seconds (A1/D sideways): B047 copier
25 seconds (A1/D sideways): B048 copier
Warm-up Time: Within 3 minutes (Room temperature 23°C)
Multi-Copy: B047: Single copies only,
B048: Up to 10 copies
Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying has finished (can be set to
1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum
Drum Charge: Scorotron corona wire and grid (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio: 1 : 1 (±0.5%)
Exposure System: Slit exposure via fiber optic array
Exposure Lamp: Fluorescent lamp (26 W)
Development: Dual-component dry toner system
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption: 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)
Development Bias: Negative
Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection using an induction
sensor
Image Density Adjustment: Development bias control + exposure control
Paper Separation: Dual wire AC corona and pick-off pawls
Cleaning: Cleaning blade
Paper Feeding: Manual feed (roll feeder optional)
Image Fusing: Teflon heat roller (upper) and a silicone rubber
pressure roller (lower)
Fusing Lamp: Halogen lamp
(115 V: 1,200 W, 230 V: 1,200 W)

SM 1-1 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS

Self-diagnostic Codes: 16 codes, displayed on the copy counter

Power Source: 115 V/60 Hz, 12 A
220 ~ 240V/50, 60 Hz, 7A
Power Consumption: Maximum: 1.4 kW
Warm-up: 1.3 kW
Ready: 0.04 to 1.3 kW
Copy cycle: 1.4 kW
Dimensions (W x D x H): B047: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm
42.5" x 22.4" x 19.3"
B048: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm
42.5" x 24.5" x 18.9"
Weight: B047: 79 kg, 174.0 lbs
B048: 80 kg, 176.0 lbs

Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration

Configuration
Additional equipment
Main frame Optional equipment
Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls) —
Roll cutting rail (B437) —
B047 copier
Table (B439) —
Side guides (B438) —
Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls) Copy tray (B440)
B048 copier
Side guide (B438) —

NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the B048 copier.

2) Key counters cannot be installed on these copiers.
3) The B048 requires a roll feeder (either 1 roll or 2 rolls). While the roll
feeders are shipped separately, they are not really optional. One must
be installed for the B048 to function properly. .

Other Optional Equipment

• Roll Holder Unit (B394)
• Drum anti-condensation heater
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

B047/B048 1-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PAPER PATH

1.2 PAPER PATH

Information
Overall
- B047 copier - - B048 copier -

E D E

A A
B B

C C

B047V102.WMF B048V102.WMF

A: Original Path
B: Manual Feed Path
C: Roll Feeder Path
D: Paper Exit
E: Original Path: Rear Feeder

There are two versions of this machine. The B047 is the basic version. It can only
make one copy at a time. The B048 is the multi-print version. It can make multiple
copies of an original (scanning and copying an original multiple times).
Both versions can be equipped with either a single or a double paper roll.

SM 1-3 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

20 21 22 1 2
3
19

18

17 4
16 5
15 6

7
14
8

9
13 10

11

12

B047V101.WMF

1. 1st Original Feed Roller 12. Roll Feed Unit (1 roll or 2 rolls)
2. 1st Press Rollers 13. Roll Paper
3. Copy Tray 14. Paper Registration Rollers
4. Exit Rollers 15. Manual Feed Table
5. Fusing Exit Rollers 16. Development Unit
6. Hot Roller 17. Toner Cartridge
7. Pressure Roller 18. 2nd Original Feed Roller
8. Gas Spring 19. Original Table
9. OPC Drum 20. 2nd Original Press Roller
10. T/S Corona Unit 21. Exposure Lamp
11. Main Drive Unit 22. Fiber Optic Array

B047/B048 1-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

Information
Overall
27 28 29
26

25

23

24

B048V101.WMF

23. Original Guide 27. Original Roller Feed Motor

24. Optional Copy Tray 28. Original Rear Press Roller
25. Original Entrance Roller 29. Original Rear Roller
26. Original Entrance Press Roller

SM 1-5 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point
index (Water proof paper).

Name Function Index. No.

Motors
Main Drives all mechanical components except the fans
32
(DC Motor).
Exhaust Fan Removes the ozone built up around the drum
5
section to the ozone filter (DC Motor).
Original Feed Drives the original feed motor (DC Motor).
45
(B048 only)

Magnetic Clutches
Registration Drives the registration rollers. 30
Toner Supply Turns on to supply toner to the development unit. 31

Solenoids
Pick-off Pawl Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum. 6

Switches
Main Supplies power to the copier. 17
Original & Paper Cuts AC power when the original or paper feed unit
18
Feed Safety are opened.
Fusing Exit Safety Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit is opened. 12
Used Toner Cover “Door Open” is displayed on the operation panel 48
when the used toner cover is open.

Sensors
Door Open Indicates “Door Open” on the operation panel and
29
prevents operation.
Toner Density Detects the density of toner in the developer. 26
Original Registration Activates when the leading edge of the original
4
passes the front of the exposure glass.
Light Measures the intensity of the exposure lamp’s
27
output.
Entrance Feed Activates when copy paper is inserted (jam
24
detector).
Registration Activates when copy paper arrives at the
25
registration rollers (jam detector).
Exit Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. 7
Original Entrance Measures the original length and detects jams. 43
(B048 only)
Original Rear Detects original jams. 44
(B048 only)
Exit Cover Open Indicates “Door Open” in the operation panel and 47
prevents operation.
Toner Overflow Detects whether the used toner tank is full or not. 46

B047/B048 1-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Name Function Index. No.

Information
Printed Circuit Boards

Overall
Main Controls all copier functions both directly and
22
through other PCBs.
PSU Converts the voltage from AC to DC voltage. 21
AC Drive Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU. 15
FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. 23
Operation Panel Controls the operation panel display. 10

Lamps
Exposure Provides light to reflect the original’s image onto
2
the drum (fluorescent lamp).
Fusing Provides heat to the fusing unit. 3
Pre-Transfer (PTL) Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to
20
image transfer.
Quenching (QL) Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum
1
surface after cleaning.

Power Packs
Charge/Bias/ Provides high voltage power for the charge corona,
19
Grid Power Pack charge grid, and development bias.
Transfer/Separation Provides high voltage power for the transfer corona
16
and separation.

Thermistors
Hot Roller Monitors the hot roller’s surface temperature. 8
Pressure Roller Monitors the pressure roller’s surface temperature. 11

Thermofuses
Fusing Protects the fusing unit against overheating. 9

Heaters
Anti-condensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier
13
(option).

Others
Total Counter Keeps track of the total length of copies made
28
(Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.).
Circuit Breaker Guards against voltage surges in the input power.
(Europe, Asia)/ 14
Fuse (U.S.A.)

SM 1-7 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EXPOSURE

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.3 EXPOSURE
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)

Descriptions
[E]

Detailed
[L]

[J]

26 mm [K]
[C]
[D] [F]

[G] [H] [I]

10 mm

J: Original Rear Roller

[A] [M]
K: Original Rear Sensor
L: Fiber Optics Array
[B]

B047D500.WMF
B047D501.WMF

NOTE: For clarity’s sake, the following description will refer to the paper’s edges
as edge [A] (furthest edge from the operator) and edge [B] (closest to the
operator).

Original Positioning
In the B048 copier, edge [A] of the original is placed onto the original table. This
activates the original entrance sensor [C].
The main motor turns the original entrance rollers [D]. The quenching lamp,
development bias and PTL also turn on.
For proper feeding (especially for a thin original), the original entrance rollers rotate
backwards (feeding towards the operator) for 300 ms. This ensures that the original
is gripped firmly by both of the original entrance rollers [D], feeding it evenly.

SM 2-1 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EXPOSURE
[A]
4 seconds after the sensor is activated,
the original feed motor starts rotating. [B]
This delay gives the user time to align
edge [A] against the original entrance
rollers [D]. This helps prevent skew.
The original is fed through the machine to
the scanning start position [E]. This
machine scans the original backwards, starting with edge [B] and scanning towards
edge [A]. The original is now ready to scan.

Scanning
The original is scanned, moving back towards the operator.
When edge [A] activates the original registration sensor [F], the roll paper feed
motor turns on. Copy paper begins to feed, and the registration clutch is activated.
When edge [B] reaches the original feed start position [E] (26 mm ahead of the
original registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops to wait for the copy
paper.
In the copy section, the registration clutch turns off once the copy paper’s leading
edge is 10 mm past the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is now applied to the
charge corona.
The original feed motor begins rotating towards the operator again at 60 mm/s, and
the original is delivered to the exposure glass. Light from the exposure lamp [M] is
reflected off the paper to the fiber optics array [L].
Once the original’s edge [B] passes the original entrance sensor, the registration
clutch and roll paper feed motor turn on again. The paper feed resumes and the
copy paper is transported to the drum [I].
To measure the original length for cutting, the copier’s CPU measures the time
from when the original registration sensor detects edge [A] until the original
entrance sensor detects edge [B].
The copy paper length is measured by counting the number of steps as the roll
paper feed motor (a stepper motor) turns. Just before the paper is cut, the feed
motor speed doubles. This creates a buckle at the trailing edge of the copy paper.
The feed motor then stops as the cutter unit cuts the paper. Copying, however,
continues. The buckle provides the necessary slack while cutting.
When making duplicate copies, the original feed motor pauses, then changes
directions again, and the original is fed back to the scanning position 200 mm/s.
Once previous paper exits out of the roll feeder, the roll paper feed starts as well,
and the process repeats.
After all copies are made, the original is delivered to the original table. If original
hold mode is enabled (SP16), the original will stop with edge [A] caught by the
original entrance rollers. The original can be fed out by pressing the ! key. If
original hold mode is not enabled, the original feeds out completely, and is not
caught.

B047/B048 2-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EXPOSURE

Start Key Enable

When the start key enabled (SP34) is set, the start key acts as a starting trigger. In
this mode, when the original activates the original registration sensor, edge [B] is
delivered to the original registration sensor position. Everything pauses until the
user presses the start key. Original feed and paper feed then resume.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 2-3 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DEVELOPMENT

2.4 DEVELOPMENT
2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
The toner supply amount ratio is determined by the following conditions.

51 ~ 100 101 ~ 150 151 ~ 200 201 ~ 250

TS 0 ~ 50 sheets 251 sheets ~
sheets sheets sheets sheets
Level (~ 30 m) (150 m ~)
(30 ~ 60 m) (60 ~ 90 m) (90 ~ 120 m) (120 ~ 150 m)
0 VTS < 4.00 VTS < 3.50 VTS < 3.00 VTS < 2.50 VTS < 2.25 VTS < 2.00
4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.50 ≤ VTS < 2.25 ≤ VTS < 2.00 ≤ VTS <
1
4.10 3.80 3.50 3.00 2.70 2.40
4.10 ≤ VTS < 3.80 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.70 ≤ VTS < 2.40 ≤ VTS <
2
4.20 4.10 4.00 3.50 3.15 2.80
N
4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.10 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.15 ≤ VTS < 2.80 ≤ VTS <
3
4.30 4.20 4.20 4.00 3.60 3.20
4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.60 ≤ VTS < 3.20 ≤ VTS <
4
4.40 4.35 4.30 4.25 3.90 3.60
5 4.40 ≤ VTS 4.35 ≤ VTS 4.30 ≤ VTS 4.25 ≤ VTS 3.90 ≤ VTS 3.60 ≤ VTS
0 VTS < 4.35 VTS < 4.30 VTS < 4.25 VTS < 3.75 VTS < 3.25 VTS < 2.75
4.35 ≤ VTS < 4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.25 ≤ VTS < 3.75 ≤ VTS < 3.25 ≤ VTS < 2.75 ≤ VTS <
1
4.38 4.33 4.30 4.00 3.50 3.20
4.38 ≤ VTS < 4.33 ≤ VTS < 4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.20 ≤ VTS <
2
4.40 4.36 4.33 4.10 3.80 3.60
L
4.40 ≤ VTS < 4.36 ≤ VTS < 4.33 ≤ VTS < 4.10 ≤ VTS < 3.80 ≤ VTS < 3.60 ≤ VTS <
3
4.42 4.40 4.36 4.20 4.00 3.90
4.42 ≤ VTS < 4.40 ≤ VTS < 4.36 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.90 ≤ VTS <
4
4.45 4.43 4.40 4.38 4.35 4.30
5 4.45 ≤ VTS 4.43 ≤ VTS 4.40 ≤ VTS 4.38 ≤ VTS 4.35 ≤ VTS 4.30 ≤ VTS
0 VTS < 4.00 VTS < 3.00 VTS < 2.50 VTS < 2.25 VTS < 2.00 VTS < 1.80
4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.50 ≤ VTS < 2.25 ≤ VTS < 2.00 ≤ VTS < 1.80 ≤ VTS <
1
4.10 3.50 3.00 2.70 2.40 2.00
4.10 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS < 2.70 ≤ VTS < 2.40 ≤ VTS < 2.00 ≤ VTS <
2
4.20 4.00 3.50 3.15 2.80 2.50
H
4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.50 ≤ VTS < 3.15 ≤ VTS < 2.80 ≤ VTS < 2.50 ≤ VTS <
3
4.30 4.20 4.00 3.60 3.20 3.00
4.30 ≤ VTS < 4.20 ≤ VTS < 4.00 ≤ VTS < 3.60 ≤ VTS < 3.20 ≤ VTS < 3.00 ≤ VTS <
4
4.40 4.30 4.25 3.90 3.60 3.50
5 4.40 ≤ VTS 4.30 ≤ VTS 4.25 ≤ VTS 3.90 ≤ VTS 3.60 ≤ VTS 3.50 ≤ VTS

TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio)

0: No supply 1: 7.5% 2: 7.5% 3: 7.5% 4: 15% 5: 100%

Toner density control table has been changed for B047/B048 copiers.

B047/B048 2-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DEVELOPMENT

Recovery from Toner End Condition

After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), the
main motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During the first 30
seconds, toner is supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3.
The main motor continues to rotate the development unit for another 30 seconds.
Then copies can be made.

Descriptions
If the TS level does not reach 3, the CPU stops the machine and displays the toner

Detailed
end condition. This prevents the operator from resetting the toner end condition by
simply opening and closing original feed unit.

SM 2-5 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CLEANING

2.6 CLEANING
2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION

[A]

[B]

B047D101.WMF

B047/B048 copiers have a used toner overflow sensor [A] and a used toner cover
switch [B].
When the used toner overflow sensor detects that the used toner tank is full, the
overflow indicator begins blinking on the operation panel. 30 more meters (A1/D
size: 50 copies, SP51) can be copied. After that, the used toner overflow indicator
stays ON, and the machine will not operate.
The used toner cover switch detects when the used toner cover is open. “Door
open” is displayed on the operation panel, and the start key is disabled.

B047/B048 2-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.1 OVERVIEW

Descriptions
[A]

Detailed
B047D102.WMF

Two thermofuses [A] (184°C, 192°C) keep the fusing unit from overheating.
Two thin-film thermistors measure the hot roller and pressure roller’s temperature.
The hot roller is a thin-shell, Teflon coated roller. The thinner roller allows a much-
shorter warm-up time. However, extra care should be taken while working around
the hot roller. It is very easy to damage.
Like the A163/A251/A252 copiers, if the fusing temperature is lower than 60°C
when the main switch is turned on, the machine assumes that it has not been used
recently, and the main motor must rotate to generate the necessary triboelectric
charge on the toner and developer.
In the A163/A251/A252 copiers, the main motor begins rotating immediately.
However, the B047/B048 copiers have a thin shell hot roller and a contact
thermistor. When cold, the thermistor is hard and might damage the roller. The
machine waits until the hot roller temperature reaches 80°C. At that temperature
the thermistor softens and the hot roller can rotate safely.
Except for the differences listed above, the B047/B048 copiers are identical to the
A251 and A252 copiers. Please refer to A163/A251/A252 copier service manual for
additional details.

SM 2-7 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Hot Roller Temperature Control

Hot Roller Temp. (°C)

198 Mode 8

Mode 7
Mode 6
190
Mode 5

180
Mode 4

Mode 3

170
Mode 2

Mode 1

160

150

142

~60 63 66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120~

Pressure Roller Temp. (°C)

198 Mode 8 Operating Temperature

190

185

180 Lower Limit

110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145

Lower Limit

B047D001.WMF

The relationship between the hot roller and pressure roller temperatures has been
changed due to the thin-shell, Teflon coated roller.

B047/B048 2-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATION)

2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE

DESTINATION)
In conjunction with the modification for the Energy Star compliance, field
technicians need to understand the new operation modes, and must be able to
configure the machine for the customer’s specific environment/requirements. This
section lists all the differences between the Energy Star compliant machines and

Descriptions
the previous models.

Detailed
Mode Non-Energy Star Energy Star
Starts timing once the last copy job is
complete. When the specified time has
passed, the copier turns off.
Auto Off Mode Not available
The time can be adjusted from 1 to 240
minutes.
Default: 30 minutes

RA
CN102

-B13
-A3
V A A [24]

Power Relay [!24]

B047D002.WMF

Mode No. Function Data

Auto Shut-off Time Determines the auto shut-off time. 1 ← 30 → 240
*15
Setting
AOF Auto off enable. 0: Disable
*33
1: Enable

SM 2-9 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSTALLATION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 15°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
2. Humidity Range: 20% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct
sunlight).
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour.
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)

Installation
6. If the location is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as follows:
a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to
high, or vice versa.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in
the summer.
c) Where it will not be directly exposed to heat.
7. Avoid exposure to corrosive gases.
8. Avoid installing anywhere higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.
9. Place the machine on a strong and level base.
10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent, strong
vibration.

SM 3-1 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Back 600 mm

Left Right
600 mm 600 mm

Front 1,000 mm

B047I505.WMF

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)

2. Back: 600 mm (24 in)
3. Right: 600 mm (24 in)
4. Left: 600 mm (24 in)

3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenter’s level.

B047/B048 3-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.4 POWER SOURCE

Important:
The machine must be installed in a building/facility equipped with a protective
device such as a circuit breaker, as the machine relies on such devices for
protection against over-current and short circuits.

1. Input Voltage Level: 120 V, 60 Hz

More than 12 A (for U.S.A. version)

220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz

More than 7 A (for European version)
2. Permissible Voltage ±10%

Installation
Fluctuation:
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.

NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

2) Avoid multi-wiring.

SM 3-3 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.1 COPIER
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:

- B048 copier -
Original Guides ........................................................................ 6 pcs
Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc
Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc
Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc
Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc
Original Guide Wire ................................................................. 1 pc

- B047 copier -
Guide Wires............................................................................. 2 pcs
Copy Tray ................................................................................ 1 pc
Copy Guide.............................................................................. 1 pc
Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc
Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc
Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc
Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc

B047/B048 3-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

Installation
[A]
[B]
[C]
B047I024.WMF

Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder.

When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A]
and the manual feed table [B] for installation.
1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),
bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feed
table [B].
2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.

SM 3-5 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

- B047 model -
[E]
[B]

- B048 model -
[F]
[F]
[C]
[F] [B]

[A]
B047I500.WMF [E]

[F]

[D]
[A] B048I502.WMF

NOTE: The installation procedures are not shipped with the copier, always bring
this manual with you.

!CAUTION
1. Unplug the power cord before performing the following procedures.
2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level.
3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make
sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takes
at least two people to lift the copier safely.
4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as you
place the copier onto the table or roll feeder.

NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. For either the table or the roll feeder, lower the feet [A] (table: 2 feet, roll feeder:
4 feet) so that it does not move while the copier is being installed.
2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] or roll feeder [D] (Place the copier feet [E]
into the table holes [F]).

!WARNING
The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
cause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the table.

B047/B048 3-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]
[I]
[C]
[D]
[D]
[J]

[A]
[E]

[L] [L]
[A] [K]
[J] B047I103.WMF

Installation
B047I001.WMF

[F]

[G]

[H]
B047I104.WMF

B047I105.WMF

3. Remove all the tape strips [A] as shown.

4. Open the original feed unit [B].
5. Remove the cushion [C] and close the original feed unit.
6. Release the lock levers [D] and open the paper path section [E].
7. Remove the right upper cover [F] (2 screws).
8. Remove the drum protection sheet [G] and remove the screw [H]. This applies
cleaning blade pressure to the drum.
NOTE: Be sure to remove the protective sheet before removing the pressure
screw. Otherwise, the cleaning blade will clamp the sheet to the drum,
and the drum may be damaged.
9. Open the fusing exit section [I]. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [J] and
the protection sheet [K].
10. Remove two strips of shipping tape [L]. Close the paper path section and fusing
exit section.

SM 3-7 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[E]

[C]

[B]
B047I503.WMF

[D]

B047I504.WMF

11. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover
[C]. Remove the sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the
developer [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown.
NOTE: Close the paper path section before opening the toner supply cover. If
the paper path section is open, the toner supply cover could fall off.
12. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.

B047/B048 3-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[C]

Installation
[D] [B] [E] B435I508.WMF

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60°°C when the main switch is
turned on, the main motor must rotate to generate a triboelectric
charge on the developer and toner. However, to prevent damage to
the hot roller, the main motor will wait until the hot roller’s
temperature reaches 80°°C before rotating. This may take a few
minutes.
In this case, it is not necessary to use the SP mode to load the
developer. Skip steps 13 to 16. After the developer is loaded from the
development entrance, turn off the main switch to stop the main
motor. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer.
13. To begin main motor rotation, enter the SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode by pressing
the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Mode key [A]
+ key [B]
+ key [B]
Clear/Stop key [C]
Clear/Stop key [C] again and hold for at least 3 seconds.
14. After 3 seconds, the wrench and toner end indicators will blink (SP
INPUT/OUTPUT mode).
15. Use the + and – keys [D] to select 23, then press the RF Select key [E]. The
main motor will begin rotating.
16. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor once the developer is loaded
from the development entrance. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer into the
development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the Clear
Modes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

SM 3-9 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[D]

[E] [C] [B] [F] B435I508.WMF

17. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear key [A]
+ key [B]
– key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold for at least 3 seconds.
18. After 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP
mode).
19. Using the + and – keys, select 36. Enter “1” by pressing the following keys.
Function Select key [E]
+ key
RF Select key [F]
This begins the developer initialization. Initialization takes about five
minutes, after which the copier will automatically return to the normal
operation mode.

B047/B048 3-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

Installation
[B]

[C] B047I507.WMF

20. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown.

1) Shake the cartridge 5 to 10 times and insert it into the toner hopper.
2) Peel off the green tape [B] from right to left to expose the clear tape and
toner supply holes.
3) Rotate the knob [C] of the cartridge clockwise until it stops.

SM 3-11 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[A]

B047I506.WMF
[C]

[E]
[D]

B047I509.WMF

B048 copier only (step 21)

21. Install the original guides [A] and original guide wire [B].

B047 copier only (step 22 and 23)

22. Attach the guide wires [C] to the copy tray [D].
23. Install the copy tray [D] and copy guide [E].

Both copiers (step 24 and 25)

24. Reinstall all the covers.
25. Check the copy quality and copier operation.
26. Install the optional roll feeder. (Refer to the Roll Feeder 1 and 2 Installation
procedures)
NOTE: While the roll feeder is optional for the B047, it is required for the B048.
You must install a roll feeder for the B048 to function properly.

B047/B048 3-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.2 TABLE (B439)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Top Plate ................................................................................ 1
Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1
Right Side Plate ...................................................................... 1
Middle Plate ............................................................................ 1
Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1
Screws with Spring Washers – M4x8 .....................................14

Installation

SM 3-13 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C]

[B]

[F]

[A]

B439I500.WMF [A]

[E]

[C]

[B] [D]

B439I551.WMF

1. Loosely install the top plate [A], left [B], and right side plate [C] (6 screws).
2. Turn the table up-side down. Be sure to rotate it as shown in the illustration.
3. Install the middle plate [D] and rear cover [E] (4 screws each).
4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [F] are completely flat.
5. Turn the table right-side up.

B047/B048 3-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.3 COPY TRAY (B440)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Copy Tray Stay ........................................................................ 1
Copy Tray Support................................................................... 1
Copy Tray Guides.................................................................... 2
Copy Tray Sheets (with rubber pads) ...................................... 3
Rear Copy Trays...................................................................... 3
Copy Tray Stoppers................................................................. 2
Stepped Screws – M4.............................................................. 2

Installation
Screws with Flat Washers – M4x6........................................... 6
Tray Sheet Guides................................................................... 3
Rear Copy Tray Sheets (no rubber pads)................................ 3
NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the B048 copier. When the copy tray is
installed on the copier, the roll feeder (B435/B436) is required.

SM 3-15 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C]

[D]

[A]

B440I117.WMF
[B]

B440I118.WMF

[E]

[F]

[A] [H]
[G]
B440I121.WMF B440I119.WMF

1. Place the copy tray stay [A] under the copy tray as shown.
2. Adhere the copy tray sheets (the Mylar strips with rubber pads) [B] to the
table’s middle plate [C]. Make sure the center copy tray sheets is positioned
between the screw holes [D] on the copy tray as shown. The left and right copy
tray sheets should be positioned over the screw holes.
3. Lift the copy tray stay and install the two stepped screws [E] to the left and right
side plates [F, G]. After the screws are in place, hook the copy tray stay [A] on
the screws. Then secure it to the left and right side plates (2 screws for each:
M4x6 with flat washers).
NOTE: Be careful when installing the copy tray stay. Do not scratch the
surface of the table.
4. Install the copy tray support [H] (2 screws: M4x6 with flat washers).

B047/B048 3-16 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[A]
10±5mm 0±5mm
0±2mm 10±5mm

Installation
B440I114.WMF
B440I113.WMF

[C]

[C]

B440I116.WMF
0±2mm
B440I115.WMF

5. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws).

6. Attach the rear copy tray sheets [B] and the tray sheet guides [C] to the rear
cover as shown.
7. Install the rear cover (2 screws).

SM 3-17 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

B440I120.WMF

60±10mm 60±10mm

80±10mm
[C] [D]
B440I123.WMF

8. Hook the rear copy trays [A] onto the copy tray stay [B].
9. Attach the copy tray stoppers [C] onto the bottom of the middle plate [D].

B047/B048 3-18 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 AND 2 (B435/B436)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Harness Covers ....................................................................... 2 pcs
Ground Plates.......................................................................... 2 pcs
Roll Feeder Drive Board .......................................................... 1 pc
Left Joint Bracket ..................................................................... 1 pc
Right Joint Bracket................................................................... 1 pc
Screws – M4x8 (Blue).............................................................. 4 pcs

Installation
Screws – M4x8 (Silver)............................................................10 pcs
Screws with Flat Washers – M4x10......................................... 2 pcs
Screw with a Spring Washer – M4x8 ....................................... 1 pc
Screws with Flat Washers – M3x6........................................... 2 pcs
Left Joint Cover........................................................................ 1 pc
Right Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc
Harness Clamp ........................................................................ 2 pcs
Paper Holder
1 Roll ................................................................................... 2 pcs
2 Roll ................................................................................... 4 pcs
Guide Plate.............................................................................. 1 pc
Front Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc
Cutter Blade Caution Decal (-27 only) ..................................... 1 pc
Joint Harness........................................................................... 1 pc

SM 3-19 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

[A]
[B]
[C]
B047I024.WMF

Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder.

When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A]
and the manual feed table [B] for installation.
1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),
bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feed
table [B].
2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.

B047/B048 3-20 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C]

[E]

[D]

Installation
[E]

[B]
[A] B436I102.WMF

!CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machine’s power cord before starting the following
procedure.
2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level.
3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make
sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takes
at least two people to lift the copier safely.
4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as you
place the copier onto the roll feeder.

1. Lower the feet [A] (4 feet) so that the roll feeder [B] does not move while the
copier [C] is being installed.

!CAUTION
Do not open the paper tray until the copier is placed on top of the roll
feeder. The paper tray drawer is very heavy. Without the copier weight to
hold it down, the roll feeder will fall over. The tray is shipped with a safety
latch holding the drawer shut.

2. Place the copier on the roll feeder. Fit the copier feet [D] into the roll feeder
holes [E].

!WARNING
The copier is not attached to the roll feeder. Pushing the copier too hard
may cause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the roll feeder.

SM 3-21 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[A]

[C]
B435I507.WMF [B]

[F]

[A]

[E]
[D]
B435I506.WMF

3. Release the lock lever [A] and open the copier paper path section [B].
4. Remove the copier’s left lower cover [C] (2 screws), lower right front cover [D]
(2 screws), lower right middle cover [E], and toner collection bottle [F] (1
connector).

B047/B048 3-22 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]
[B]

[E]

Installation
B435I105.WMF
B435I101.WMF

[C]

B435I104.WMF

[D] B435I127.WMF

5. Pull out the paper tray [A] and install the left [B] and right [C] joint brackets (2
screws each: blue).
6. Remove the paper tray stopper [D] (1 screw).
NOTE: After the copier has been placed on the roll feeder, the paper tray can
be pulled out and the paper tray stopper can be removed.
7. If necessary, adhere the appropriate language cutter blade caution decal [E]
over the English decal on the paper tray as shown.

SM 3-23 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B] [B]

B435I106.WMF
[A] [F] [C] B435I122.WMF

[D]

[G]
B435I124.WMF

[E]
[H]

[I]
B435I108.WMF
[D]
B435I110.WMF

8. Remove the roll feeder’s rear cover [A] (6 screws).

9. Remove the copier’s rear cover [B] (2 screws).
10. Remove the small caps [C] from the copier’s rear cover using cutting pliers.
11. Install the roll feeder drive board [D].
12. Connect the following harness connectors as shown.
DC harness [E] — Roll Feeder Drive board
Joint harness [F] — Roll Feeder Drive board

B047/B048 3-24 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Joint harness [G] — Copier Main Control board (3 clamps)

AC harness [H] — AC Drive board [I]
[B]

[A]

[C]

Installation
[A]
B435I107.WMF
[C]

B435I109.WMF

B435I125.WMF

13. Install the grounding plates [A] (1 screw for each: M4x8).
14. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw: M4x8 with a spring washer) to the
copier.
NOTE: To ensure proper grounding, tighten the ground wire’s screws until the
spring washer is completely flat.
15. Install the harness covers [C] (1 screw for each: M4x10 with flat washers).
NOTE: Fold the harness covers around the harness, then attach with a single
screw.
16. Reinstall the rear cover of the roll feeder (6 screws).
17. Clamp the power cord to the rear cover of the roll feeder (2 screws: M4x8).
18. Put back the copier’s rear cover.

SM 3-25 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

[C, D]

19. Hook the guide plate [A] on the copier and then secure it (2screws: M4x8).
20. Install the front joint cover [B] (2 screws: M3x6 with flat washers).
21. Reassemble the copier.
22. Install the left and right joint covers [C, D] (2 screws for each: M4x8 each).

B047/B048 3-26 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[G]

[D]

Installation
[E] [C] [B] [F] B435I508.WMF

Length PRG. PRG.

300 1100
Temperature NO. NO.
NORMAL XX 42 XX 45

23. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.
24. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Modes key [A]
+ key [B]
– key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold it for at least 3 seconds.
25. After 3 seconds, the roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP
mode).
26. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter “1” (B435: 1 roll) or “2” (B436: 2 rolls)
by pressing the following keys.
Function Select key [E]
+ key
RF Select key [F].
27. To set the paper cut length adjustments, input values into SP modes 42 and 45
as listed on the decal attached to the right side plate.
NOTE: 1) When the values for SP modes 42 and 45 are set, the paper cut
length adjustment values for vellum and film are automatically
entered (SP modes 43, 44, 46 and 47).
2) In the case of the 2 roll feeder, you must enter values for both the
1st and 2nd roll. The value for the 1st roll can only be entered when
the corresponding indicator [G] is blinking (same for 2nd roll). Use
the Function Select Key to switch between the two rolls.
28. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode.
29. Check the roll feeder operation.

SM 3-27 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.5 ROLL CUTTING RAIL (B437)

The installation is identical to that of the A163 copier’s roll cutting rail (A570).
Please refer to the A163 service manual for details. The roll cutting rail and the roll
feeder cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.

B047/B048 3-28 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TABLES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SERVICE TOOLS

4. SERVICE TABLES
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Service Program Mode Table
1. A “*” before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed by
customers or sales representative.
2. In the data column, the default value is printed in bold letters.
The default settings for several items depend on the machine destination (refer
to page 4-28.).
Mode No. Function Data
Fusing Selects the fusing temperature for 0: Mode 1
Temperature 1 plain paper. 1: Mode 2
(Normal) 2: Mode 3
*1 3: Mode 4
4: Mode 5
5: Mode 6
6: Mode 7

Service
Tables
Fusing Selects the fusing temperature for 0: Mode 5
Temperature 2 translucent paper. 1: Mode 6
*2
(High) 2: Mode 7
3: Mode 8
Fusing Selects the fusing temperature for 0: Mode 2
Temperature 3 translucent film. 1: Mode 3
*3
(Low) 2: Mode 4
3: Mode 5
Copy Count Select weather the user display panel 0: Up
*4
Up/Down counts up or down. 1: Down
Beeper On/Off Turns the beeper on and off. 0: On
1: Off
2: Turn the beeper off
*5 when holding the button
down to rapidly change
the edge margin or
paper length.
Paper Feed Out Sets the copy time-out. Begins timing 0: 2 minutes
Waiting Time when a sheet of copy paper has been 1: 1 minute
Setting manually fed, or if the Roll Feed Select 2: 3 minutes
*6
key is pressed. If a copy is not made 3: 4 minutes
within the specified time limit, the copy 4: 5 minutes
paper is ejected.
Manual Feed Start Sets the manual feed delay. The timer 0: 2 seconds
Time Setting begins when the entrance sensor 1: 0.7 second
detects the paper’s leading edge. 2: 1 second
*7
Once the specified time has passed, 3: 3 seconds
the registration rollers start rotating. 4: 4 seconds
5: 5 seconds

SM 4-1 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Leading Edge This sets the speed at which the Changes every:
Increase/Decrease leading edge setting increases or 0: 0.1 second
Speed Setting decreases. 1: 0.50 second
When the customer holds down the + 2: 0.25 second
*8
or – key, there is a brief pause. After a 3: 0.05 second
selected number of 0.25 second 4: 0.02 second
intervals (See SP 12), the values begin
to change at the selected speed.
Auto Reset Time Sets the delay for the auto reset. After 0: 2 minutes
Setting finishing a copy job, the machine will 1: 1 minutes
wait the specified amount of time. If no 2: 3 minutes
*9
other jobs are begun, it will then 3: 4 minutes
automatically reset the copy settings to 4: 5 minutes
its default values. 5: No auto reset
Auto Energy Saver Enables and disables the auto energy 0: No
Mode saver mode. If enabled, the machine 1: Auto Energy Saver
*10
will automatically go into energy saver Mode
mode after it auto resets.
Screen Message Selects one of the options indicated on 0: None
Setting the display in the energy saver mode. 1: Pre-HEAt
2: Hello i lovE yoU
*11
3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4: SLEEPinG
5: HavE A Good dAy.
Leading Edge When the user hold downs the + or – 0: 3 intervals
Increase/Decrease key to change the leading edge 1: 1 intervals
Adjustment margin, print number or paper length, 2: 2 intervals
*12 Preliminary Interval there is a pause before the values 3: 10 intervals
begin to change rapidly.
This paused is measured in 0.25
second intervals.
Original Feed Out Sets the original time-out. The timer 0: 2 minutes
Waiting Time begins when an original is placed on 1: 1 minute
Setting the original table in manual feed mode 2: 3 minutes
*13
(B048 copiers only). After the selected 3: 4 minutes
time, the original is automatically 4: 5 minutes
ejected. 5: No auto feed out
Original Feed Start Sets the delay between when the 0: 1 second
Time Setting original entrance sensor or original 1: 2 seconds
rear sensor is actuated, and when the 2: 3 seconds
*14 original feed roller begins rotating 3: 4 seconds
(B048 copier only). 4: 5 seconds
5: 6 seconds
6: 7 seconds
Auto Shut-off Time Determines the auto shut-off time. 1 ← 30 → 240
*15
Setting
Original Hold Mode After original scanning is finished, the 0: No
original exit roller stops before 1: Original Hold mode
completely feeding out the original.
This prevents the original from falling
*16 onto the floor after scanning.
The original is fed out when the !
key is pressed or when the next
original is inserted into the rear feed.
(B048 copier only).

B047/B048 4-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Length Size Adjusts the speed of the original feed –1.0 ← 0.0 → 1.0
Magnification motor (B048 copier only). Shorter Longer
*17
The setting can be changed by the key
operation.
Semi-synchro Cut Sets the cutting method for semi- 0: Pressing the roll
Original Scanning synchro cut mode (B047 copiers only). paper cut key
Mode When using the default method, the 1: Inserting the original
user must manually press the roll again
paper cut key as the trailing edge of
the original passes the table’s edge.
*18 When using the alternate method, the
user feeds the original once, and the
original length is measured. The user
then feeds the original a second time,
and it is scanned and copied. The copy
is automatically cut to the appropriate
length.
Synchro-cut Length Adjusts the cut length in the semi- –25 ← 0 → 25
Adjustment synchro cut mode (B047 copier). Shorter Longer
Adjusts the cut length in the synchro 1 mm/step
*19
cut, preset cut, and variable cut modes
(B048 copier). The setting can be
changed by a key operation.

Service
Tables
Paper Length Determines weather the paper length 0: Down
Count Up/Down cycles down (to smaller sizes) or up (to 1: Up
*20
Setting larger sizes) when the preset cut key is
pressed.
Paper Length This sets the speed at which the paper 0: 0.10 second
Up/Down Speed length setting increases or decreases. 1: 0.5 second
Setting When the customer holds down the + 2: 0.25 second
*21 or – key, there is a brief pause. After a 3: 0.05 second
selected number of 0.25 second 4: 0.02 second
intervals (See SP12), the values begin 5: 0.01 second
to change at the selected speed.
Fixed Paper Size Selects the fixed paper size pattern Refer to page 4-24.
*22 Pattern Setting chosen when the “Preset Cut” key is
pressed.
Optional Paper Up to 10 different paper size can be UdEF: Undefined
*23 Size Setting stored in SPs 23 to 32. If “19” is
to selected in SP No. 22, these values
*32 are used when the “Preset Cut” key is
pressed.
AOF Auto off enable. 0: Disable
*33
1: Enable
Start Key Enable Select whether the start key can be 0: Disable
*34
used as a start trigger. 1: Enable
All Indicators ON Turns ON all indicators on the 0: No
35 operation panel when the Roll Feed 1: All indicators on
Select key is pressed.

SM 4-3 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

New Developer Carries out the new developer If the initialization is
Initialization initialization for 5 minutes. The canceled before returning
machine counts down the remaining to the normal operating
time on the display. After the mode, do it again from the
initialization, the machine automatically beginning. If the machine
36 adjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0 ± fails to adjust the toner
0.1 V. During the toner sensor sensor output, “E = 11” is
adjustment, “Adj” is displayed. When displayed.
the adjustment is completed, the
machine automatically returns to
normal operating mode.
Darker Image Sets the range of the ID density control 0: Standard Density
Density to give finer control over darker 1: Darker Image Density
images. Default level 3 shifts to new ID
level 7 (see the chart for the new
levels). ID level 8 to 14 cannot be
shifted.

*37 The light sensor output and

development bias will change as
follows:
ID level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Default ID level 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 — —
Light Sensor Output 0.9 0.9 0.88 0.84 0.8 0.8 0.8
Development Bias 160 140 120 120 120 80 60

Release Fusing Recovers from the fusing unit SC 0: Release SC

Unit Service Call condition. After it has been recovered, 1: SC condition
38
the machine returns to its initial (power
on) condition.
39 Not Used
Roll Feeder Sets up the installed roll feeder. 0: No
Identification 1: Roll Feeder Installed
When this value is changed, the (1 roll)
settings in SP42 and SP45 are set to 2: Roll Feeder Installed
0. These SPs then update the SPs (2 rolls)
40 linked to them. SP42 updates SP43
and SP44. SP45 updates SP46 and
SP47. Each SP mode setting (SP43,
44, 45, and 47) can be changed
independently in the appropriate SP
mode.
Roll Feeder Speed Adjusts the roll paper’s feed speed. 0: Standard
41 Setting –50 ← 0 → 50
(Factory Use) Faster Slower

B047/B048 4-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Roll Feeder Cutting Adjusts the cutting length of 300 mm in 0: Standard
Length Adjustment the plain paper mode. –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm
(300 mm, Plain Longer Shorter
Paper) When this value is changed, the values
for SP43 and SP44 are automatically
changed according to the following
table:
Inch versions Meter versions
SP42 X SP42 X
SP43 X SP43 X – 0.4
SP44 X + 0.5 SP44 X + 0.5
42

If the settings in SP43 or SP44 exceed

the maximum and/or minimum values,
the maximum or minimum values are
used instead.
Note:
The value for the 1st roll feed can only
be input when the corresponding
indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll
feed). Use the Function Select Key to

Service
Tables
switch between the two indicators.
Roll Feeder Cutting To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm
Length Adjustment in the translucent paper mode.
(300 mm,
Translucent Paper) Note:
43 The value for the 1st roll feed can only
be input when the corresponding
indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll
feed). Use the Function Select Key to
switch between the two indicators.
Roll Feeder Cutting To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm
Length Adjustment in the translucent film mode.
(300 mm,
translucent Film) Note:
44 The value for the 1st roll feed can only
be input when the corresponding
indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll
feed). Use the Function Select Key to
switch between the two indicators.

SM 4-5 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Roll Feeder Cutting Adjusts the cutting length of 1,100 mm 0: Standard
Length Adjustment in the plain paper mode. –50 ← 0 → 50 mm
(1,100 mm, Plain Longer Shorter
Paper) When this value is changed, the values
for SP46 and SP47 are automatically
changed according to the following
table:
Inch versions Meter versions
SP45 X SP45 X
SP46 X – 1.0 SP46 X – 2.4
SP47 X + 0.8 SP47 X + 0.8
45

If the settings in SP46 or SP47 exceed

the maximum and/or minimum values,
the maximum or minimum values are
used instead.
Note:
The value for the 1st roll feed can only
be input when the corresponding
indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll
feed). Use the Function Select Key to
switch between the two indicators.
Roll Feeder Cutting To adjust the cutting length of 1,100
Length Adjustment mm in the translucent paper mode.
(1,100 mm,
Translucent Paper) Note:
46 The value for the 1st roll feed can only
be input when the corresponding
indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll
feed). Use the Function Select Key to
switch between the two indicators.
Roll Feeder Cutting To adjust the cutting length of 1,100
Length Adjustment mm in the translucent film mode.
(1,100 mm,
Translucent Film) Note:
47 The value for the 1st roll feed can only
be input when the corresponding
indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll
feed). Use the Function Select Key to
switch between the two indicators.
Semi-synchro-cut Adjusts the cut length in the semi- –10 ← 0 → 10
48 Length Adjustment synchro cut mode (B047 copier only). Shorter Longer
0.1 %/step
Main Motor Speed Changes the main motor speed. 0: Standard
Adjustment –9 ← 0 → 11
Slower Faster
When making long
copies, if the main motor
49
speed is incorrect, rJ98 or
rJ99 error messages will
be displayed. Use this SP
to make the necessary
adjustments.

B047/B048 4-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Toner End Determines the maximum number of 0: 27 sheets
Detection Setting copies (when A1 paper is used) that 1: 9 sheets
50
can be made after the toner near end 2: 18 sheets
condition has been detected. 3: 36 sheets
Toner Overflow Determines the maximum copy length 0: 30 m
Detection Setting that can be made after the toner near 1: 6 m
overflow condition has been detected. 2: 53 m
51
3: 77 m
4: 100 m
5: 142 m
Used Toner Indicates the maximum copy length tF=XX,XXX (Beeper)
Counter that can be made before the used
toner near overflow condition is
triggered
52
This counter is automatically cleared
when the toner overflow condition is
cleared after emptying the used toner
in the bottle.
Used Toner Manually clear the used toner counter. 0: Full toner condition
Counter Clear is not detected
1: Full toner condition
53 is detected.

Service
Tables
To clear the counter, input
“0” even if “0” is already
indicated.
Developer Sets the developer agitation time. 0: 50 seconds
Warm-up Setting If the fusing temperature is lower than 1: 2 minute
60°C when the main switch is turned 2: 3 minute
54 on, the main motor rotates for the set 3: None
amount of time, generating a
triboelectric charge on the developer
and toner.
Paper Length Limit Determines the maximum paper (In mm mode)
Setting length. 0: 3,000 mm
1: 3,600 mm
Note: 2: 5,200 mm
If paper longer than 2,000 mm is used, 3: 6,800 mm
you may experience skewed or 4: 8,400 mm
creased copies, poor fusing, or 5: 9,999 mm
55 damage to the original.
(In inch mode)
0: 118.0 inch
1: 160.0 inch
2: 240.0 inch
3: 320.0 inch
4: 400.0 inch
5: 480.0 inch

SM 4-7 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Copy Number Limit Determines the maximum number of 0: 99 sheets (B047)
Setting copies. The default settings for the 1: 10 sheets (B048)
B047 and B048 copiers are different. 2: 20 sheets
3: 30 sheets
4: 40 sheets
56
5: 50 sheets
6: 60 sheets
7: 70 sheets
8: 80 sheets
9: 90 sheets
Emergency Stop Determines how the emergency stop 0: Only original drive
Key Function key functions. 1: Original, main motor,
Setting roll feed drives.
When set to 0, the emergency stop key
only stops the original drive.

When set to 1, it stops the original

drive, main motor drive, and roll feed
57 drive (B048 copier only).

When a roll runs out of paper, if a layer

of white paper remains wrapped
around the core, the machine might
not detect the paper end condition.
This can cause a noise or a Wrong
Paper Feed error. If this SP is set to 1,
you can use the emergency stop key
to recover from this error.
Repeat Copy Determines the maximum copy length 0: 1,200 mm/48 inch
Length Limit Setting for multiple copies (B048 copier only). 1: The maximum paper
58
length determined by
SP55.
Misfeed Special While the Emergency Stop key is held 0: No
59 Recovery Mode down, power is still supplied to the 1: Misfeed Special
main motor and registration clutch. Recovery Mode
Fixed Paper Length Adjusts the size of the selected preset 0: Normal
Special Mode paper size. 1: Fixed Paper Length
Each time the +/– keys are pressed Special Mode
60
while holding down the Preset Cut key,
the preset paper size is adjusted by
the amount selected in SP 61.

B047/B048 4-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Fixed Paper Length Selects the interval of each step for (In mm mode)
Special Mode SP60. 0: 100 mm
1: 50 mm
2: 60 mm
3: 120 mm
4: 200 mm
5: 240 mm
6: 250 mm
7: 500 mm
8: 600 mm
61
(In inch mode)
0: 10.0 inch
1: 5.0 inch
2: 6.0 inch
3: 12.0 inch
4: 20.0 inch
5: 24.0 inch
6: 25.0 inch
7: 50.0 inch
8: 60.0 inch
Special Toner In the energy saver mode, 10% toner 0: No
Supply Mode supply is done while the “Emergency 1: Special Toner Supply
Stop” key is pressed. Toner sensor Mode

Service
Tables
62
voltage is displayed on the “Paper
Length” indicator. If the voltage is
lower than 1 V, toner is not supplied.
63 Not Used
SP Mode Display Sets the display speed. 0: 300 ms/letter
Speed Setting 1: 100 ms/letter
64 2: 200 ms/letter
3: 400 ms/letter
4: 500 ms/letter
ROM Version Indicates the ROM version. Example:
Display vEr_1994_06_06_01

Year Date

Month
65
Suffix
0: No, 1: A, 2: B,
3: C … 9: J

Internal Use Only

RAM Abnormal The value is set based on the RAM The condition of the RAM
Condition Check check. Shows the condition of the is checked when the
66 back-up RAM. machine is powered on.
0: Normal
1: Abnormal
Machine Operation Displays the total time (hours) that the dc = X,XXX
67 Counter machine has been in operation (total
time the motor has been rotating).
68 Not Used

SM 4-9 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Total Copy Length/ Displays the total copy length in feet. SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX
69 Number Display
(Feet)
Total Copy Displays the total copy length/number SP70: t0 = XXX,XXX
Length/Number according to the following units. SP71: t1 = XXX,XXX
Display SP70 = Yard SP72: t2 = XXX,XXX
70
SP71 = meter SP73: t3 = XXX,XXX
to
SP72 = 100 inches SP74: t4 = XXX,XXX
75
SP73 = 50 inches SP75: t5 = XXX,XXX
SP74 = A1 length (594 mm)
SP75 = sheet (any size)
OPC Counter Displays the total length of copies (in dO = XX,XXX
meters) on the current OPC drum. This counter should be
76 cleared when the OPC
drum is replaced.
(SP#-1)
Developer Counter Displays the total length of copies (in dE = XX,XXX
Display meters) on the current developer. This counter is
77 automatically cleared
when new developer is
initialized.
Toner Counter Displays the total length of copies (in dT = XX,XXX
Display meters) on the current toner cartridge This counter is
78 automatically cleared
when a new toner
cartridge is installed.
Toner Supply Level Indicates the present toner sensor dL = ab - - c
Indication level. a: Toner density setting
n, H, L
b: TS level
0~5
c: Copy number step
79
0: ~ 30 m
1: ~ 60 m
3: ~ 90 m
4: ~ 120 m
5: ~ 150 m
6: 150 m ~
Developer Displays the total number of times the dnF = XX (total number
Initialization developer has been initialized (SP36). of developer
Number Counter Also displays the value of the initializations)
developer counter (SP77) when the Hde = XX,XXX
80
last developer initialization was (developer
performed. counter at the
last developer
initialization
Toner End Number Displays the total number of toner end dtE = XX
Counter conditions (dtE). Also, displays the Hdt = XX,XXX
81
toner counter (SP78) at the last toner
end condition (Hdt).
Toner Near End Displays the total number of toner near dtn = XX
Counter end conditions (dtn). Also, displays the Hdt = XX,XXX
82 toner counter (SP78) when the last
toner end condition was triggered
(Hdt).

B047/B048 4-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Roll Feed Speed Adjust the roll feed speed for –50.0 ← 0 → 50.0
83 Adjustment translucent paper. 10 steps = 0.09%
(translucent paper)
Roll Feed Speed Adjust the roll feed speed for film. –50.0 ← 0 → 50.0
84
Adjustment (film) 10 steps = 0.09%
Number of Displays the total number of jams by Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam)
Misfeeds by location. J1 ∼ J8 (initial jam)
Location J10 ∼ J45 (original jam)
85 J51 ∼ J72 (copy paper
jam)
J80 ∼ J99 (roll feeder
paper jam)
Misfeed Record Displays the locations of the last five J1 = XX (Last jam)
Display misfeeds. Locations are displayed one ↓
at a time. J2 = XX (1 before the
last jam)
↓
J3 = XX (2 before the
last jam)
↓
86
J4 = XX (3 before the
last jam)

Service
↓

Tables
J5 = XX (4 before the
last jam)
↓
Beeper
(XX = Jam Location)
Preset Cut Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm. –20 ← 0 → 20
87 Adjustment (3,000 1 step = 1 mm
mm, plain paper)
Preset Cut Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm. –20 ← 0 → 20
Adjustment (3,000 1 step = 1 mm
88
mm, translucent
paper)
Preset Cut Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm. –20 ← 0 → 20
89 Adjustment (3,000 1 step = 1 mm
mm, film)
Number of Service Displays the total number of service Et = X,XXX (total SCs)
90 Call by Location calls (SC) and lists the SCs by E1 ∼ E15 (each SC)
location.
Service Call Displays the last five service calls. SCs E1 = XX (The last SC
Records are displayed one at a time. Xcode)
E2 = XX (1 before the
last SC code)
E3 = XX (2 before the
91 last SC code
E4 = XX (3 before the
last SC code
E5 = XX (4 before the
last SC code
Beeper (XX = SC code)
92 Not Used
to
99

SM 4-11 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

RAM Clear Clears selected data items from the 0: Not Used
RAM. 1: Machine Operation
To clear the memory, input the number (The memory for
of the item you want to delete, then SP67)
press the " key. 2: Copy Length Counter
(SP69 to 75)
Note: 3: OPC Counter (SP76)
If all the memory is cleared (if a 4: Developer Counter
number from 20 to 28 is selected), you (SP77)
(*Note1)
/
must reenter the roll cutter settings Developer Initialization
from the decal attached inside the Number (SP80)
upper right cover. 5: Toner Counter (SP78)/
Please refer to page 4-14 for the Toner End Number
default settings for each destination. (SP81)/Toner Near
(When No. 10 to 26 is selected.) End Number (SP82)
6: Counter for toner
(*Note2)
density step.
7: Clear data No.1 to 9
and 53.
8: SC Counter
(SP90 to 91)
9: Jam Counter
-1 (SP85 to 86)
10: Change the settings to
the Japan version
11: Change the settings to
the U.S.A. version
12: Change the settings to
the Europe version
13: Change the settings to
the Asia version
14: Change the settings to
the NRG version
15: Change the settings to
other version 1
16: Change the settings to
other version 2
17: Change the settings to
other version 3
18: Not Used
19: Not Used
20: Clear all the memory
and change the
settings to the
Japanese version

*Note1:
This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163
manual).
*Note2:
For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after the
developer initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 and after
150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

B047/B048 4-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

RAM Clear Clears selected data items from the 21: Clear all the memory
RAM. and change the
To clear the memory, input the number settings to the U.S.A.
of the item you want to delete, then version
press the " key. 22: Clear all the memory
and change the
Note: settings to the Europe
If all the memory is cleared (if a version
number from 20 to 28 is selected), you 23: Clear all the memory
must reenter the roll cutter settings and change the
from the decal attached inside the settings to the Asia
upper right cover. version
Please refer to page 4-25 for the 24: Clear all the memory
default settings for each destination. and change the
(When No. 10 to 26 is selected.) settings to the NRG
-1 version
25: Clear all the memory
and change the
settings to other
Other 1 version
26: Clear all the memory
and change the
settings to other

Service
Other 2 version

Tables
27: Clear all the memory
and change the
settings to other
Other 3 version
28: Not Used
29: Not Used
30: Clear all the memory
Total Counter Unit Selects the unit which the total counter 0: 1 yard
Setting counts by. 1: 1 m
2: 100 inches
-2 3: 50 inches
4: A1 length (594 mm)
5: Sheet (Any size)
6: 1 foot
Inch/mm Exchange Selects the unit in which the edge 0: mm
-3 margin and paper length is indicated 1: Inch
by.
-4 Not Used
Registration Adjusts the paper registration for the 0: Standard
Adjustment by-pass feed. When this setting is –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm
-5
changed, the same setting will be set Advance Delay
for SP#-45 (Roll Feeder Registration).
Light Sensor Change the settings for the light 50: Standard
Adjustment sensor. 0 ← 50 → 99
Darker Lighter
While in this mode, the exposure lamp
-6 can be turned ON and OFF using the
Copy Media key.
Translucent paper: ON
Translucent Film: OFF

SM 4-13 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Hot Roller Change the hot roller temperature 0: Standard
-7 Temperature setting. –9 ← 0 → 9°C
Adjustment Decrease Increase
Pressure Roller Change the pressure roller 0: Standard
-8 Temperature temperature setting. –9 ← 0 → 9°C
Adjustment Decrease Increase
Hot Roller/ Displays the hot roller temperature and Fu = XXX
Pressure Roller pressure roller temperature. Pr = XXX
Temperature Even after the SP mode is canceled, Fu: Hot roller
Display the temperature will be displayed temperature
during the copy cycle and in standby Pr: Pressure roller
mode temperature
To stop this, turn the main switch off If the hot roller
and on. temperature is lower than
-9 80°C (pressure roller
temperature is lower than
50°C), “LLL” is displayed.
If the hot roller
temperature is higher than
220°C (pressure roller
temperature is higher than
180°C), “HHH” is
displayed.
Drum Charge Determines the drum charge voltage. 200: Standard
Setting In this mode, the charge corona can be 150 ← 200 → 249
turned on and off using the Copy Low High
-10
Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
Copy Grid Setting Determines the copy grid voltage. 9: Standard
In this mode, the grid voltage can be 0 ← 13 → 15
turned on and off using the Copy Low High
-11 Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
Transfer Corona Determines the transfer corona 80: Standard
Voltage Setting voltage. 40 ← 80 → 120
In this mode, the transfer corona can Low High
be turned on and off using the Copy
Media key.
-12 Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
To facilitate setting SP modes, when
SP#-12 is entered, SP#-13 will be
automatically set to (SP#-12’s value X
1.5)
Transfer Voltage at Determines the transfer corona voltage 120: Standard
the Paper’s Trailing at the paper trailing edge. 40 ← 120 → 249
Edge In this mode, the transfer corona can Low High
-13 be turned on and off using the Copy
Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

B047/B048 4-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Separation AC Determines the AC separation corona 170: Standard
Voltage setting voltage. 130 ← 170 → 220
In this mode, the separation corona Low High
can be turned on and off using the
Copy Media key.
-14 Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
To facilitate setting SP modes, when
SP#-14 is entered, SP#-15 will be
automatically set to (SP#-14’s value X
1.12).
Separation AC Determines the AC separation corona 190: Standard
Voltage at the voltage at the paper’s leading edge. 130 ← 190 → 220
Paper’s Leading In this mode, the separation corona Low High
-15 Edge can be turned on and off using the
Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
Separation DC Determines the DC separation 200: Standard
Voltage setting corona’s voltage. 0 ← 200 → 249
In this mode, the separation corona Low High

Service
Tables
can be turned on and off using the
Copy Media key.
-16 Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
To facilitate setting SP modes, when
SP#-16 is entered, SP#-17 will be
automatically set to (SP#-16’s value X
1.5)
Separation DC Determines the DC separation 200: Standard
Voltage at the corona’s voltage at the paper leading 0 ← 200 → 249
Paper Leading edge. Low High
Edge In this mode, the separation corona
-17 can be turned on and off using the
Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
-18 Not Used
to
-19
Bias Voltage for the Determines the development bias 3: Standard
Image Area voltage for the image area. 0←3→8
In this mode, the bias voltage can be Low High
-20 turned on and off using the Copy
Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF

SM 4-15 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Bias Voltage for Determines the development bias 4: Standard
Non-image Area voltage for the non-image area. 0←4→8
Setting In this mode, the bias voltage can be Low High
-21 turned on and off using the Copy
Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
Toner Density Selects the toner density setting. The 0: Standard
Setting toner density changes according to the 1: Low
copy length after the developer is 2: High
replaced.
Copy Length
Std. Low High
(A4 size)
~ 30m
4.00V 4.35V 4.00V
(~ 50 sheets)
~ 60m
-22 3.50V 4.30V 3.00V
(~ 100 sheets)
~ 90m
3.00V 4.25V 2.50V
(~ 150 sheets)
~ 120m
2.50V 3.75V 2.25V
(~ 200 sheets)
~ 150m
2.25V 3.25V 2.00V
(~ 250 sheets)
150m ~
2.00V 2.75V 1.80V
(251 sheets ~)

Toner Supply Selects the length of time that the 0: 60 s

Periods in Toner machine adds toner after clearing the 1: 70 s
-23
End Condition toner end condition. 2: 80 s
3: 90 s
Original Feed Motor Adjusts the speed of the original feed –50 ← 0 → 50
-24 Speed Adjustment motor (B048 copier only). Faster Slower
0.030%/step
Original Repeat Used to check skew when printing 0: Off
Skew Check Mode multiple copies (B048 only). 1: On
When using this mode to make
multiple copies, only the first and last
copies are actually printed. The other
copies are just scanned. By comparing
the two copies, you can check for
skew.
Procedure
-27 1. Select 1 in this mode.
2. Exit from SP mode.
3. Select the manual feed and enter
the copy quantity to 3 or more.
4. Place the sheet on the manual feed
table and place the original on the
original table.
5. After all the copies are made,
change SP#-27 to 0 or turn the main
switch off and on. (This mode will be
canceled.)

B047/B048 4-16 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Length Size The fusing roller’s speed is slightly –100 ← 10 → 100
Magnification higher than the drum speed. Shorter Longer
Compensation on The speed of the copy paper transport –2.5% +2.5%
Leading Edge will increase slightly after the leading
edge of the copy paper enters the
-28
fusing unit.
To compensate for this, the speed of
the original feed motor is corrected
from the leading edge to 183 mm
(B048 copier only).
Registration Adjusts the paper registration for the 0: Standard
Adjustment for the rear original feed (B048 only). –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm
Rear Feed If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this setting Advance Delay
is used for the paper registration for
-29
the front original feed as well as the
rear original feed. In this case, this
adjustment is automatically set for the
SP#-5 adjustment.
Toner Density Changes the toner density sensor 80: Standard
Sensor Voltage voltage. Normally, the value is 50 ← 80 → 120
Setting automatically adjusted when the new Low High
developer initialization (SP36) is done.
In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL and

Service
Tables
-30 the bias voltage for non-image area
can be turned or and off using the
Copy Media key.
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
Toner Sensor Displays the toner sensor output A = X,XX
-31 Voltage Display voltage for the last copy. (Beeper)
(Last Copy)
Toner Sensor Displays the real time toner sensor A = X,XX
Voltage Display output voltage.
(Real Time) In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL A = Toner Sensor Voltage
and the bias voltage for non-image During the stand-by
areas can be turned on and off using condition, and copy
the Copy Media key. cycling the following data
Translucent paper = ON is displayed.
Translucent Film = OFF A = X,XX
When this SP mode is canceled, the ↓
-32 LE = X,XXX
voltage will be continually displayed
during the copy cycle and in standby ↓
mode (the toner sensor output voltage, CO = XX
paper length and copy counter are ↓
displayed one at a time). (Beeper)
To stop this, turn the main switch off
and on. LE = Paper Length
(ex. 297 mm: LE=0.297
12 inch: LE=0.120)
CO = Copy counter
-33 Not Used
to
-34

SM 4-17 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Synchro-cut Length Adjusts the original cut length in –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9
Auto Adjustment Synchro Cut mode based on a 297 1 step = 0.1 mm
(297 mm) mm sheet (standard length). Insert the
297 mm length original five times (this
number displayed on the copy number
indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If
the actual original length is different
-35 from the standard length, input the
following value in the cut length
indicator before inserting the original:
Actual Length - Standard Length
Then the machine automatically
calculates the correct value, and the
value of SP#-38 is changed.
Synchro-cut Length Adjusts the original cut length in –50 ← 0 → 50
Auto Adjustment Synchro Cut mode at 1,189 mm. 1 step = 0.1 mm
(1,189 mm) Insert the 1,189 mm length original five
times (this number displayed on the
copy number indicator can be
changed: 1 to 10). If the actual original
length is different from the standard
-36 length, input the following value in the
cut length indicator before inserting the
original:
Actual Length - Standard Length
Then the machine automatically
calculates the correction value. The
data is overwritten on SP#-39.
-37 Not Used
Synchro-cut Length Adjusts the synchro cut length for a –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9
Manual Adjustment 297 mm original. Increasing the 1 step = 0.1 mm
-38 (297 mm) number will shorten the paper cut (This value is over written
length. when SP#-35 is
performed.)
Synchro-cut Length Adjusts the synchro cut length for a –50.0 ← 0 → 50
Manual Adjustment 1,189 mm original. Increasing the 1 step = 0.1 mm
-39 (1,189 mm) number will shorten the paper cut (This value is over written
length. when SP#-36 is
performed.)
-40 Not Used
to
-44
Roll Feeder Adjusts the paper registration from the 0: Standard
Registration roll feederS. When SP#-5 (Registration –9.9 ← 0 → 9.9
-45
Adjustment) is carried out, this data will Delay Advance
be automatically set with that data.
Forced Ready Forces the machine into the “Ready” 0: Normal
Condition condition regardless of the fusing 1: Forced Ready
-50 (Factory Use) temperature. This mode cannot be Condition
used during the start-up development
agitation.
Lamp Off Mode Fluorescent lamp does not turn on 0: Normal
-51
during the copy cycle. 1: Lamp off

B047/B048 4-18 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

No Misfeed Ignores jam error signals, except for 0: Normal
Detection Mode initial jams. The setting automatically 1: No Misfeed Detection
-52
resets to “0” when the main switch is
turned off.
Free Run Mode The machine caries out copy operation 0: Normal
without an original. This mode can be 1: Next Paper is fed
used if the optional roll feeder is when the fusing exit
installed and selected paper length is sensor is deactivated.
more than 594 mm. 2 ~ 250:
-53
The machine starts operation when the Next paper is fed (X-
roll feed select key is pressed, and 1) seconds after the
stops when the Emergency Stop key is fusing exit sensor is
pressed. deactivated.
X = Input Number
-54 Not Used
Toner End Sets the process for toner end 0: Normal
Recovery recovery. When set to the default 1: Forced recovery
value, the toner density is checked as
described in the Toner Density Control
-55
section 2.4.2.
Forced recovery skips this testing
procedure, and just clears the toner
end condition.

Service
Tables
Used Toner Full When the toner overflow counter is 0: Toner overflow
Condition Detection used, this sets the maximum copy sensor
-56 length. Once the counter reaches this 1: 840 m
value, the used toner full condition is 2: 480 m
triggered. 3: 1,180 m
Roll Feed Speed Not used. Do not change this setting 0 ← 5 → 10
-57 Correction Slower Faster
(Plain Paper)
Roll Feed Speed The fusing section’s transport speed is 0 ← 5 → 10
Correction slightly faster than the roll feeder’s. Slower Faster
(Translucent Paper) This is done to stretch the copy paper.
However, due to over-stretching,
creases may develop along the trailing
edge when the copy paper is longer
than 1,200 mm. To prevent this, the
-58 roll feeder’s speed is increased slightly
every second once the paper feed
length exceeds 1,200 mm. The speed
is changed 5 times.
5 in this SP can be used to set the final
roll feed speed equal to the fusing
section’s. Do not change this value in
the field. It is for designer use only.
Roll Feed Speed Not used. Do not change this setting. 0 ← 5 → 10
-59 Correction Slower Faster
(Film)
Fluorescent Lamp Tracks the amount of time that the 0 ~ 250:
Abnormal Time exposure sensor is more than 1 V The total time
Check 1 higher than the target value. (seconds) that the lamp
-60
voltage is more than 1
volt higher than the
target value.

SM 4-19 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Fluorescent Lamp Tracks the amount of time that the 0 ~ 250:
Abnormal Time fluorescent lamp is at full power during The total time
-61 Check 2 the copy cycle. (seconds) that the
fluorescent lamp is at
full power.
Light Sensor Displays the real time light sensor Fd = X,XX
Voltage Display output voltage. Fd = Light Sensor Voltage
(Factory use) In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL
and the bias voltage for non-image
areas can be turned on and off using
the Copy Media key.
-62 Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
Even if the SP mode is canceled, the
voltage is displayed while copying and
when in standby mode.
To stop this, turn the main switch off
and on.
-63 Factory Use Only
Manual Feed Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on the 0: No
-64 Attention Mode 1 manual feed table before the “Set 1: Manual Feed
Paper” indicator comes on. Attention Mode 1
Manual Feed Beeper sounds when the manual table 0: No
-65 Attention Mode 2 is ready to accept the next sheet. 1: Manual Feed
Attention Mode 2
Partial copy Allows the user to set a larger or 0: No
Leading Edge smaller leading edge margin in partial 1: A new margin can be
Margin copy mode. set in the partial copy
-66
B047 can only increase the margin, mode
while B048 can both increase and
decrease it.
Toner Full Supply In the Special Toner Supply mode 0: No
Mode (SP62), if both the clear/stop key and 1: Toner Full Supply
-67
the Emergency Stop key are pressed, Mode
toner is supplied at 100%.
Combine Originals Normally the copy process stops at the 0: Normal
Mode trailing edge of paper or original which 1: Combine Originals
ever comes first. If this mode is Mode
selected, copy process continues to
-68
the copy’s trailing edge even if the
original trailing edge comes first.
Use this mode to combine several
originals onto a single copy.
-69 Not Used
Synchro-cut Rear Normally, an original cannot be 0: Normal
Feed Mode inserted into the rear feeder while in 1: Synchro-cut Rear Feed
Synchro-cut mode. If 1 is selected, an Mode
original can be inserted from the rear
side even if Synchro-cut mode is used.
-70
This cannot be used with the trailing
edge margin function.
In this mode, the copy will be about
200 mm longer than the original (B048
copier only).

B047/B048 4-20 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Cut Length Display In semi-synchro cut mode, the 0: Non-Length Display
Mode machine stores the 1st original cut 1: Length Display
length and displays it in the paper
length counter.
The paper cut mode will automatically
be changed to the Preset/Variable cut
mode.
For the 2nd copy, it is not necessary to
-71 press the cut key at the trailing edge of
the original. Also, before the 2nd
original is inserted, the cut length in the
cut length counter can be changed
using the “+”/“–” keys. The value can
be changed within the normal range of
the semi-synchro cut (410 mm ~
3,000, 16.5' ~ 118.0') (B047 copier
only).
Original Feed Motor Selects the speed of the original feed 0: 200 mm/s
Returning Speed motor in returning original mode. A 1: 150 mm/s
-72
Setting slower speeds may be necessary for 2: 100 mm/s
thinner originals (B048 copier only).
Roll Feeder Start Determines the timing of the roll 0: Trailing edge is
Timing feeder. detected.

Service
Tables
The default value begins the roll feeder 1: Original insertion
just after the original registration
sensor is activated.
It can also be set to start after the
trailing edge passes the original
entrance sensor.
-73 The default value provides a faster first
copy and increases 1 to 1 CPM.
If the emergency stop key is pressed
while the original is being transported
to the scanning start position, copy
paper is cut and fed out of the copier.
Whichever setting is selected, the first
copy and 1 to 1 CPM are within
specification.
Original Transport Select whether the original is 0: Original is
Mode transported from the original table to transported directly
the scanning start position directly, or to the start position.
whether the original is returned to the 1: Original is returned to
scanning start position after the trailing the start position after
edge of the original passes through the the original passes
-74 original registration sensor (B048 through the original
copier only). registration sensor.
The default setting (= 0) handles
curled originals better. If the setting is
changed from 0 to 1, perform the
synchro-cut length auto adjustment
(SP#-35, #-36).

SM 4-21 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Mode No. Function Data

Fusing Determines how the machine recovers 0: No recovery
Temperature when the fusing temperature drops (The machine simply
Recovery Setting below the target value. This is only continues copying,
triggered when making multiple copies ignoring the fusing
using fusing mode 8 (highest temperature.)
temperature mode) (B048 copier only). 1: Stops copying and
-75 feeds out the
original.
2: Stops copying but the
original is not fed out.
Copying starts again
after the fusing
temperature recovers.
Original Transport Sets the operation of the original 0: No
Torque Down transport torque. 1: Down during transport
forward
-76
2: Down during transport
both forward and
backwards

B047/B048 4-22 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table
The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paper
length indicator (“ON” or “OFF” is displayed). If the selected program number is not
used, “NOT” is displayed.

Program No. Sensor/Switch/Signal

-1 Registration Sensor
-2 Exit Sensor
-3 Original Registration Sensor
-4 Entrance Sensor
Main Motor LOC Signal
-5
(Status is “ON” when the main motor is rotating normally.)
Door Switch
-6
(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)
-7 Original Entrance Sensor (B048 copier only)
-8 Original Rear Sensor (B048 copier only)
-9 Not Used
-10 R/F Leading Edge Sensor

Service
-11 Roll Feeder Door Switch

Tables
-12 Right Cutter Switch
-13 Left Cutter Switch
-14 Paper End Sensor (1st Roll)
-15 Paper End Sensor (2nd Roll)
Exit Cover Open
-16
(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)
-17 Used Toner Cover Switch
-20 Toner Overflow Sensor
-21 Toner Overflow Sensor Connection
-24 Total Counter
-26 Fusing SC Detection

Output Check Mode Table

Press the " key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of the
component is displayed in the paper length indicator.
To turn off the component, press the " key again.

Program No. Electrical Component Note

0 Main Motor
1 Toner Supply Clutch
2 Pick off solenoid
3 Registration Clutch
4 Total Counter
5 Pre-transfer Lamp
6 Quenching Lamp
7 Fusing Lamp

SM 4-23 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE TOOLS

Program No. Electrical Component Note

8 Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio)
9 Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)
10 Main Charge Corona
11 Grid Voltage
12 Transfer Charge Corona
13 Not Used
14 Separation Charge Corona
15 Exhaust Fan
16 to 19 Not Used
20 Bias Voltage for the Image Area
21 Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area
22 Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage
Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for the
23
Non-image Area + Quenching Lamp
Original Feed Motor (Forward)
24
(B048 copier only)
Original Feed Motor (Reverse)
25
(B048 copier only)
26 Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters
27 Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note
28 Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Forward)
29 Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Reverse)
30 Roll Feed Clutch 1
31 Roll Feed Clutch 2
32 Fusing SC Release
Original Feed Motor Original feed motor
(Forward and Reverse) operation changes every
(B048 copier only) time the roll feed key is
pressed.
33
1st time: Forward
2nd time: Stop
3rd time: Reverse
4th time: Stop
34 Main Switch OFF (Energy Star) Turn off the main switch.

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutter
switches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in the
paper length indicator. When the roll feeder is pulled out during this
operation, the operation will stop.

B047/B048 4-24 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JAM CODE LIST

Code Cause of Jam Remarks

Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper is
dJ45
fed 3,500 mm.
Registration sensor OFF is detected just after starting the
pJ51
copy process.
Registration sensor OFF is detected before starting the roll
pJ52 B047 only
feeder again.
pJ53 Entrance sensor ON is detected during roll feeding.
Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed
pJ55
3,500 mm.
Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading
pJ60
edge.
Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper leading
pJ61
edge.
Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing
pJ62
edge.
Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper trailing
pJ63
edge.
pJ70 Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading edge.
pJ71 Exit sensor ON is detected at the paper leading edge.
pJ72 Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing edge.
Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading
rJ80
edge.
Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper leading
rJ81
edge.
rJ90 Paper cutter failure
rJ91 Door open during roll feeding
Roll feeder.
rJ95 Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 600 mm more than the
maximum paper length.
Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper trailing
rJ98
edge during roll feeding.
Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing
rJ99
edge during roll feeding.

B047/B048 4-26 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JAM CODE LIST

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)

In mm Mode
0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297
1: 3000, 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 280
2: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000,
900, 800, 700, 600, 500, 400, 300, 280
3: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841,
594, 420, 297, 280
4: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 280
5: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 280
6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364
7: 3000, 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 280
8: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 280
9: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880,
841, 813, 788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364,
297, 280
10: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 280
11: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 280
12: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500,
1450, 1400, 1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800,

Service
Tables
750, 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 280
13: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750,
700, 650, 594, 550, 500, 420, 297, 280
14: 3000, 2400, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625,
594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 280
15: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 280
16: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 280
17: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297,
280
18: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280
19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

In inch Mode
0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0
1: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
2: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0
3: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
4: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0,
11.0
5: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 11.0, 10.0
6: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0,
20.0, 15.0, 11.0, 10.0
7: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0,
12.0, 11.0
8: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0,
11.0
9: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0,
24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0

SM 4-27 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JAM CODE LIST

10: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 47.5, 45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0,
12.5, 11.0, 10.0
11: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0
12: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0
13: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
14: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0,
56.0, 54.0, 52.0, 50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0,
26.0, 24.0, 22.0, 20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 11.0, 10.0
15: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0 11.0
16: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0,
18.0, 12.0 11.0
17: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0,
45.0, 42.0, 39.0, 36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0 11.0
18: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7,
24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1
19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No. Japan U.S.A. Europe Asia NRG Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 Other 4
#1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
#2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
#4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
#5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
#6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4
#9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
#17 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
#19 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0
#20 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
#21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5
#22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#33 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
#-2 1 6 1 1 1 1 6 1
#-3 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
#-6 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

#13, #14, #17: B048 only

B047/B048 4-28 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD

Noise Filter

Service
AC Drive Board

Tables
TB202 TB201

B047S500 WMF

Service Remark for 220 ∼ 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive board
as shown.
1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on the
noise filter.
2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on the
noise filter.
3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3
on the noise filter.
4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal
4 on the noise filter
5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 on
ac drive board.
6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202
on ac drive board.

SM 4-29 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE REMARKS

AC Drive Board

TB202 TB201

B047S501.WMF

Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly
1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) white connector to
TB201 on ac drive board.
2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to
TB202 on ac drive board.

B047/B048 4-30 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 DRUM UNIT

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.4 DRUM UNIT
5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT

[D]
[E]

[C] [B]

[F] [H]

[G]

[B]
[A] B047R539.WMF

Replacement

Adjustment
and
1. Remove the drum unit.
2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring).
3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each).
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when
removing or reinstalling the drum.
4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft.
5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it clockwise as shown.
6. Remove the drum flange [E].
7. Replace the drum with new one.
NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the
projection of the gear is on the drum side.
2) When re-installing the bearing holders, make sure that the right
bearing holder [G] has two mylar seals [H] attached. The mylar seals
determine the position between the drum unit and copier side plate.
This also helps to ensure an even image density on the copy.

SM 5-1 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUSING

5.5 FUSING

[B]

[A]
B047R101.WMF

5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Remove the hot roller thermistor [A] (1 screw, clamps).

5.1.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [B] (2 screws, 6 clamps, and 2 connectors).

B047/B048 5-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUSING

5.1.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

[A]

[B]
B047R538.WMF

!CAUTION
When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start to drive
the fusing section. However, this does not occur immediately. The machine
waits until the hot roller is heated to above 80°°C. Keep your hands away
from any mechanical and electrical components during this period.

Replacement

Adjustment
This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced.

and
Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (165°C), Mode 2 (170°C), Mode 3 (175°C), Mode 4
(180°C), Mode 5 (190°C), Mode 6 (193°C), Mode 7 (198°C)
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the copier rear cover.
3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by the
harness.
4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A].
5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, and wait
for at least 10 minutes.
6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at the
middle of the hot roller.
7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used
(use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature.
9. Reassemble the machine.

SM 5-3 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

When: Registration is not within the registration tolerance.

Purpose: To maintain proper registration.
Registration 0±3 mm (0±0.12")
Tolerance:
SP#-5 (by-pass feed), SP#-29 (B048 rear original feed), SP#-45 (roll
Perform:
feed)
How: Change the start timing of the registration roller using SP#-5, SP#-27,
and/or SP#-45

1. Make several copies using manual feed or the roll feeder and check the
registration.
2. If the registration is not within the registration tolerance, adjust the registration
using SP#-5, SP#-29 and/or SP#-45.
NOTE: When SP#-5 is changed, the data in SP#-45 will be automatically set to the
same value. To adjust SP#-45 separately, you must change it after
adjusting SP#-5.

B047/B048 5-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator ! and SC codes
are displayed.
SC Codes E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E15, E17 and E18 cannot be cleared by
simply turning the main switch off and on. For safety reasons, you must set SP38
from “1” to “0” to clear these.

6.1.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal
Definition
The light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds.
Points to Check
• Exposure lamp
• Light sensor
• FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -3)
• Main board (CN103-7, and CN105-A13, -A14, -B17, -B18)

SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

Definition
After turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot roller
thermistor does not reach 100°C within 4 minutes and 30 seconds.
Points to Check
• Fusing thermofuse
• Hot roller thermistor
• AC drive board

shooting
Trouble-
• Main board (CN102-A3, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open

Definition
After turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot roller
thermistor does not reach 50°C within 3 minutes.
Points to Check
• Hot roller thermistor
• AC drive board
• Fusing thermofuse
• Main board (CN102-A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SM 6-1 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 11 May, 2001

SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

Definition
The resistance of the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 KΩ.
Points to Check
• Hot roller thermistor
• Main board (CN102-A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

Definition
The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 MΩ.
Points to Check
• Pressure roller thermistor
• Main board (CN102-A4, -B12, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short

Definition
The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 KΩ.
Points to check
• Pressure roller thermistor
• Main board (CN102-A4, -B12, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

Definition
The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor exceeds 250°C.
Points to Check
• Hot roller thermistor
• Fusing thermofuse
• AC drive board
• Main board (CN102-A1, -B13, -B14)

B047/B048 6-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error

Definition
After turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot roller
thermistor does not reach the target ready temperature within 12 minutes.
Points to Check
• Hot roller thermistor
• Fusing lamp
• Fusing thermofuse
• AC drive board
• Main board (CN102-A3, -A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)
• AC harness

SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

Definition
The toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts.
NOTE: After initializing the developer, this condition cannot be triggered until at
least 251 copies are made.
Points to Check
• Toner density sensor
• Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area
• Main board (CN105-A5, -A6, -B25, -B26)

SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal

Definition
The main motor is on, but the main board does not receive a signal from the
motor for two seconds.
Points to Check
• Main motor
• Mechanical interference of the main motor drive

shooting
Trouble-
• Main board (CN103-1, -2)

SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error

Definition
The new developer initialization process cannot adjust the toner density sensor
voltage to its standard range (4.1± 0.1 volts).
NOTE: After clearing the SP code, the previous data of SP#-30 will continue to
be used until the next toner initialization.
Points to Check
• Toner density sensor
• Developer
• Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area
• Main board (CN105-A5, -A6, -B25, -B26)

SM 6-3 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 11 May, 2001

SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal

Definition
Total counter does not operate.
Points to Check
• Main board
• AC Drive board

SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal

Definition
The zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second of turning on the main
switch.
Point to Check
• Main board
• AC Drive board

SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal

Definition
After sending the reset signal, the main switch does not turn off within 0.45
second.
Point to check
• Main switch
• Main board

SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature

Definition
While in the copy ready state, the machine detects 3 or more hot roller
temperature changes within 60 seconds, or 2 or more within 2 seconds. The
change must be greater than 20°C in 1 second.
Point to Check
• The thermistor is out of position

SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light

Definition
In the copy ready condition, the fusing lamp turns on at full power continuously
for more than 120 seconds while the hot roller is not rotating.
- Point to check -
• Poor thermistor cable connection
• Poor fusing unit connection

B047/B048 6-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe Version
Fuse No. Specification Symptom
FU301 250 V 3.15 A No power.
FU302 250 V 6.3 A No indication. Beeper sounds.
FU303 250 V 6.3 A This symptom will occur when all of three
FU304 250 V 6.3 A fuses are open.

U.S.A. Version
Fuse No. Specification Symptom
FU301 125 V 6.3 A No power.
FU302 250 V 5 A No indication. Beeper sounds.
FU303 250 V 5 A This symptom will occur when all of three
FU304 250 V 5 A fuses are open.

AC Drive Board
Fuse No. Specification Symptom
125 V 15 A No power.
FU201
(U.S.A. version only)
No power is supplied to the de-humidify
FU202 250 1 A
heater.
250 V 8 A No power.
CB201
(Europe version only)

shooting
Trouble-

SM 6-5 B047/B048

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROLL FEED UNIT
B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SPECIFICATIONS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Roll Paper Size: Width:
210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36"
Length:
150 meters
Diameter:
Less than φ170 mm
Cut Size: –Preset Cut:
1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm, 420 mm, 297 mm
48", 36", 24", 18", 12" 46", 34", 22", 17", 11"
Up to 10 extra preset cut lengths can be set using
SP23 ~ 32.
–Selected Length Cut:
297 mm to 3,000 mm (1 mm per step) 11" to 118"
(0.1" per step)
Paper Transport Velocity: 60 mm/s
Control: Microprocessor
Power Source: +24 volts and +5 volts from the copier
Power Consumption: Maximum 110 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,200 mm x 720 mm x 775 mm
47.24" x 28.35" x 30.51"
Weight: 78 kg, 171.6 lbs (1 roll)
86 kg, 189.2 lbs (2 rolls)

Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436

SM 7-1 B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of
the Point to Point index (Water proof paper).

Name Function Index No.

Motors
Cutter Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor). 59
Roll Feed Drives all mechanical components except
61
the cutter unit (Dc Stepper Motor).

Magnetic Clutches
Roll Feed 1 Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the 1st
56
roll feed roller.
Roll Feed 2 Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the
60
2nd roll feed roller.

Switches
Right Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at the
54
right home position.
Left Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at the
57
left home position.
Dehumidity Turns on the RF Dehumidity heaters when
62
not copying.

Sensors
Paper End 1 Detects when the roll runs out of paper. 51
Paper End 2 Detects when the roll runs out of paper. 50
Leading Edge Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading
edge of the paper, triggering the paper 55
length pulse count.
Door Indicates “Door Open” on the operation
58
panel and disables the key operation.

Printed Circuit Board

RF Drive Controls all roll feed unit functions
49
accordance with copier CPU.

Others
RF Dehumidity Heater 1 Removes humidity from the roll paper. 53
RF Dehumidity Heater 2 Removes humidity from the roll paper. 52

B435/B436 7-2 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL OPERATION

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION
2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION

[D]

[B]
[C]

[A]

B436D501.WMF [D]

Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436

B436D103.WMF

There are two types of the roll feed unit. B435 Roll feed unit has one roll feed unit
(1st [A]). B436 Roll feed unit has two roll feed units (1st [A] and 2nd [B]). The cutter
unit [C] uses a sliding rotary cutting blade.
When turning on the main switch or when roll paper is replenished, the roll feed
motor rotates and the leading edge of the roll paper is fed until the roll lead edge
sensor [D] is activated. Then, the leading edge of the roll paper is returned to the
paper feed start position (60 mm before the cutter unit).

SM 7-3 B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL OPERATION

[B]

[A]

B436D502.WMF

After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper is
directed to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotating
once the registration sensor detects the leading edge of the copy paper. The copy
paper stops and waits for the original. Shortly after the original registration sensor
is activated by the original, the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start to
rotate. The copy paper starts to feed again.
Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speed of the roll paper feed
motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the copy paper.
When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motor stops and the cutter
unit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motor has stopped, the
registration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. The paper is cut during
the time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled taut. This allows for a neat cut.
When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 340 mm, the paper reaches
the selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again. In this case,
after the registration roller stops, the roll paper feed motor continues to rotate and a
paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. The registration roller brake
ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration rollers as the
excess paper is fed forwards. The paper is then cut.
When the selected cut length is between 340 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unit
cuts the paper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. [RW1]
The paper buckle forms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, because
the paper feed roller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. The
registration roller brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the
registration rollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.

B435/B436 7-4 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL OPERATION

2.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION

[A]

B436D503.WMF

The roll paper end sensor [A] is located above each roll. When the roll paper runs
out and the roll paper end sensor detects the black core of the roll, roll end is
indicated on the operation panel. If the paper is not caught by the feed rollers,
paper feed fails. In this case, roll end is indicated instead of a paper misfeed
indication.

2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM

[D]
[C]
[F]

[E]

Roll Feed Unit

[G]
B435/B436

[B]

[H]
B436D102.WMF

The roll feed exit roller [B] is driven by the roll feed motor [C] through timing belts
[D] and gears [E]. The feed roller [F] of each roll feed unit is driven by the roll feed
motor through the belt and each gear and each roll feed clutch [G]. Each feed roller
can be driven manually by each knob [H].

SM 7-5 B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL OPERATION

2.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION

[B]
[A]

[C]

B436D104.WMF

The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixed
blade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paper in
both directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutter.
The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotary cutting blade
knob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.

B435/B436 7-6 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT

[C]

[B]

[D]

[F]

[A]

B436R102.WMF [F]

[G]

[E]

B436R103.WMF

1. Remove the roll feed unit’s front cover [A] (2 screws and 4 hooks) and left inner
cover [B] (2 screws).
2. Remove the left tray lock lever [C] (1 screw and 1 spring) and tray stopper [D]
(2 shoulder screws and 1 spring).
Roll Feed Unit
B435/B436

3. Remove the two screws [E] and disconnect the three connectors [F].
NOTE: When removing and/or reinstalling the connectors, take care not to
damage the harnesses. Make sure that you do not pinch the harnesses
when reinserting the cutter unit.
4. Slide the cutter unit [G] out as shown.

SM 7-7 B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.2 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR

REPLACEMENT

[B] [C]

[A]
[D]

B436R107.WMF

1. Pull out the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the sensor casing [A] (2 screws).
3. Replace the leading edge sensor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector).
NOTE: When reinstalling the sensor casing, be sure to align the sensor casing’s
pins [C] with the holes [D] in the sensor bracket.

B435/B436 7-8 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

3.3 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

[B]

[B]
[A]

B436R101.WMF

1. Pull out the roll feed unit [A].

2. Remove the 4 screws [B] (right side 2 screws and left side 2 screws).
3. Lift the roll feed unit and place it gently onto the floor or other flat surface.

Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436

SM 7-9 B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

3.4 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

[A]

[D]
[C]
[E]

[E]

[D]
[B]
[I]
B436R104.WMF [K] [J] [F]

[H]

[G]

B436R105.WMF

1. Remove the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the left inner cover.
3. Remove the roll feed paper guide plate [A] (4 screws).
4. Remove the roller knob bracket [B] (1 screw).
5. Remove the snap ring [C] and two retaining rings [D] and two bushings [E].
6. Disconnect the connector for the roll feed clutch harness [F] (2 clamps).
7. Remove the roll feed roller [G] and clutch [H] (1 retaining ring and 1 timing belt
[I]).
NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the clutch, make sure that the clutch pin [J] is set in
the cutout [K] of the stopper.
2) After putting all the parts back, turn the roller knob and verify that the
timing belt drives the roll feed roller.

B435/B436 7-10 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT

3.5 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
[B]

1. Pull out the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the left inner cover.
3. Remove the four screws [A] securing the roll feed motor, then remove the roll
feed motor [B] (1 connector).

Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436

SM 7-11 B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.6 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]

[D]

[C]

1. Remove the 2 screws [A] holding the clamps for the power supply cord.
2. Remove the roll feed rear cover [B] (6 screws).
3. Remove the roll end sensor bracket [C] (1 screw and 1 hook).
4. Replace the roll end sensor [D] (1 screw and 1 connector).

B435/B436 7-12 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

3.7 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed to
correct cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factory
without the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier on
which it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length as
follows:
NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying
because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its length temporarily.

Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: ±3 mm (for Length Shorter than 420

mm) ±5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) ±11 mm (3,000 mm)

NOTE: 1) There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperature
mode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type.
[Normal (SP#42, 45, 87), High (SP#43, 46, 88), Low (SP#44, 47, 89)].
2) There are two settings of SP#42 to 47 when the 2 rolls feeder is
installed. Adjust the 2nd roll cut length by the same manner of the 1st
roll cut length adjustment. Repeat the same steps after 1st roll cut
length adjustment.

1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in the

preset cut mode.
2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample and preset
cut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference.
3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length is
within the adjustment standards.
Example: 1) Current SP data #42....0
Copy sample length = 297 + 4
Set SP mode #42...–4.0
2) Current SP data #42....0
Copy sample length = 297 – 4
Set SP mode #42...+4.0
4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode and check
their length.
Roll Feed Unit
B435/B436

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 if necessary.

6. Make 5 copy samples of 3,000 mm length. Make sure the average cut length is
within the adjustment standards.
7. If it is not within the adjustment standards, change the values using SP modes
#87 to 89.

SM 7-13 B435/B436

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

[A]

[B]

1. Raise the lever [A] in the left roll holder [B].

2. Adjust the roll paper side position. Lower the lever to fix the position.

B435/B436 7-14 SM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 BULLETIN NUMBER: 740-001 05/12/95
APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

GENERAL:
The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information shouldeb
incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

• UPDATE NO. 1 - SPRING HOOK - The old style Spring Hook (54199653) is no longer produced.
However, the two new style Spring Hooks (shown below) have been made
available as replacement options.

Spring Hook - SS-22

Spring Hook - SS-21

OLD
NEW

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
54199653 Spring Hook 1 45 6
A1639504 Spring Hook - SS-22 1 45 6
A1639505 Spring Hook - SS-21 1 45 10*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM

Operating Sheet

• UPDATE NO. 2 - OPERATING SHEET - Please add the

Operating Sheet to your Parts Catalog
as indicated below.

REFERENCE
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1631385 Operating Sheet 1 7 27*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 002 10/11/95

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: GROUNDING PLATE SPRING AND BUSHINGS

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
To ensure grounding of the Lower Entrance Guide, the Grounding Plate Spring has been replaced by the
Grounding Wire as shown below. Also, the material of the Exit Unit Bushing has been changed. This
information should be incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL
12. PAPER EXIT SECTION 1 13. PAPER EXIT SECTION 2 (A163)

The material of this bushing

has been changed.

ELECTRICAL
The material of this bushing
has been changed.

PAPER PATH
Grounding Plate Grounding Wire
Spring

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1634464 Grounding Plate Spring

FSM
A1635640 Grounding Wire 1 1 1 29 7
08053385 Bushing - 6mm
50530447 Bushing - 6mm 2 2 1 31 103

UNITS AFFECTED:
PARTS

All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3844120069 will have the new style Grounding Wire
and Exit Unit Bushings installed during production.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OTHER

NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 003 12/22/95

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bull
etin
package contains 2 sets of replacement pages.

MECHANICAL
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 1-1 Additional Information Developer Type

• 4-11 Additional Information Addition of SP Mode 15

ELECTRICAL
PAPER PATH
FSM
PARTS
OTHER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 004 1/26/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

❏
COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: ENERGY STAR MODIFICATION (DETAILS)

GENERAL:
To conserve energy, the copier automatically turns "OFF" 30 minutes after the last copy job has been

MECHANICAL
completed. The details of the machine operation are as follows:

• AUTO OFF MODE To automatically turn "OFF" the copier, a new type of Main Switch with an
incorporated coil is used. The connector layout is shown below.

Main Switch

ELECTRICAL
AC Harness

Relay

PAPER PATH
Upper DC Harness

❏ FSM
Lower DC Harness

• SP MODE New software (ROM A1635208) provides an additional SP Mode to adjust the
Auto Off Timer. Replace page 4-11 of the Field Service Manual with the updated
❏ PARTS

page provided with this package.

Mode No. Function Settings

15 Auto off time can be selected 1~ 120 minutes (1 minute per step)
Default : 30 minutes
OTHER

The Auto Off time can also be selected by the customer. Refer to page 3 of this bulletin for the pr
ocedure.

Continued...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004
Page 2 of 4

The Auto Off mode is prohibited during the following conditions:

* The roll feeder is operating

* A sheet of paper is set on the feed table
* A Jam or SC indicator is "ON"
* The Toner End indicator is "ON" or the Used Toner Bottle is full

NOTE: When you use a new style Main Board (modified for Energy Star) in a non-Energy Star machine,
remove the ROM (A1635208) from the new Main Board and install ROM (A1639506) in its place.
Also, when you replace the RAM Board, please clear all memory (SP1-21) and input the factory
data referring to the Field Service Manual.

NOTE: For part numbers, refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-005

• INSTRUCTION SHEET

An additional explanation sheet has been added to the operating instructions. Please make copies of
the
following two pages and add them to the operating instructions that were shipped with the copier.

Continued...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004
Page 3 of 4

Continued...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004
Page 4 of 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 005 1/26/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

❏
COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.
Main Switch
Relay (new part)

MECHANICAL
Relay

AC Harness

ELECTRICAL
Lower DC Harness
Upper DC
Harness

PAPER PATH
NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin
#PUB-066.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

❏ FSM
A1631095 A1631100 Right Latch Bracket 1➝1 3/S 35 23
12041545 12042421 Main SW 1➝1 3/S 35 118
A1631257 A1631256 Lower Right Front Cover - 115V 1➝1 3/S 7 15
A1635600 A1635702 AC Harness 1➝1 3/S 35 3 ■
A1635605 A1635704 Lower DC Harness 1➝1 3/S 35 5
PARTS

A1635608 A1635706 Upper DC Harness 1➝1 3/S 35 4

A1635206 A1635208 ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC) 1➝1 3/S 39 1
A1635200 A1635230 Main Board 1➝1 3/S 35 7
12081392 Relay 0➝1 35 119*
A1638637 Operating Instructions - Energy Star 0➝1 43 6*
OTHER

* DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the parts listed above inst
alled
during production.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 005 REISSUE ★ 03/20/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

❏
COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.
Main Switch
Relay (new part)

MECHANICAL
Relay

AC Harness

ELECTRICAL
Lower DC Harness
Upper DC
Harness

PAPER PATH
NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin
#PUB-066.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

❏ FSM
A1631095 A1631100 Right Latch Bracket 1➝1 3/S 35 23
12041545 12042421 Main SW 1➝1 3/S 35 118
A1631257 A1631256 Lower Right Front Cover - 115V 1➝1 3/S 7 15
A1635600 A1635702 AC Harness 1➝1 3/S 35 3 ■
A1635605 A1635704 Lower DC Harness 1➝1 3/S 35 5
PARTS

A1635608 A1635706 Upper DC Harness 1➝1 3/S 35 4

A1635206 A1635208 ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC) 1➝1 3/S 39 1
A1635200 A1635230 Main Board 1➝1 3/S 35 7
12081392 Relay 0➝1 35 119*
A1638637 Operating Instructions - Energy Star 0➝1 43 6*
OTHER

* DENOTES NEW ITEM

★ UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial NumberA3845070122 will have the parts listed above installed
during production.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 006 2/7/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bull
etin

MECHANICAL
package contains 2 sets of replacement pages.

PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

ELECTRICAL
• 5-19 Updated Information

PAPER PATH
FSM
PARTS
OTHER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 007 02/21/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information should
be

MECHANICAL
incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

• UPDATE NO. 1 - T & S CORONA CASING - To meet CE Mark Standards, the following parts have
been changed.

ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AD023113 A1633130 T & S Corona Casing 1→1 0 25 9

A1635450 A1635455 Quenching Lamp 1→1 0 23 38

PAPER PATH
A1632254 A1632257 Grounding Spring Plate 1→1 0 37 26

A1635440 A1635439 Pre - Transfer Lamp - 24V 7.2W 1→1 0 15 1

A1633867 A1633869 T & S Corona Guide Plate 1→1 0 17 9

A1634120 A1634121 Fusing Lower Stay 1→1 0 27 28

A1635636 A1635637 Separation Power Pack Harness 1→1 0 35 14

FSM
A1635200 A1635230 Main Control Board 1→1 0 35 7
40 *

UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the new style T & S Corona
Casing, etc... installed during production.
PARTS

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OTHER

NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Continued...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 007
Page 2 of 2

• UPDATE NO. 2 - PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION - Add Spacer (A1634355) to your Parts
Catalog as indicated below.

Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

20 mm

25 Spacer - Fusing Entrance

mm

REFERENCE
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A163 4355 Spacer - Fusing Entrance 0→1 27 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 008 03/20/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: ORIGINAL STOPPERS

GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

Rubber tubes have been added on the both right and left original stoppers to ensure that the origina
l
stoppers are being held in position. This information should be incorporated into all existing FW74
0 Parts
Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL
Left Original Stopper

ELECTRICAL
Rubber
Tubes Right Original Stopper

FSMPAPER PATH
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AA161118 Tube - 3 x 4.5 x 3 0➝2 7 28*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM PARTS

UNITS AFFECTED:
Not available at time of publication.
OTHER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 009 09/27/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG ADDITIONS

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following Parts Catalog additions are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This informatio
n should
be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL
Page 14
Philips Pan Head Screw

Photointeruptor

ELECTRICAL
FSMPAPER PATH
PARTS

REFERENCE
NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW020012 Photointeruptor 1 15 13*
03130100B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 X 10 1 15 130*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
OTHER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 010 09/27/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
To achieve optimal copy quality, it may be necessary to adjust the fusing temperature based on theype
t of
copy paper used and the specific environmental conditions in which the machine is located. The tables

MECHANICAL
below demonstrate how to adjust the fusing temperature to compensate for these factors.

Environmental conditions: L/L ------ 15°C, 20%RH

M/M ---- 23°C, 65%RH
H/H ----- 30°C, 80%RH

ELECTRICAL
1. Plain Paper

Paper T6200/T6000 Azon Bond Azon Recycled Regma 61gr Regma 75-80gr
Bond
Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
Mode 8

PAPER PATH
Mode 7
Mode 6
Mode 5
Mode 4
Mode 3 O O O O O
Mode 2 O O O O O O
Mode 1 O O O O

Paper Regma 90gr Regma 110gr Ozalid EF-Weiss FSM

Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
PARTS

Mode 8
Mode 7 O O O
Mode 6 O O
Mode 5 O
Mode 4
Mode 3 O
Mode 2 O
OTHER

Mode 1 O

Continued...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 010
Page 2 of 2

2. Vellum

Paper TA-70 Azon Vellum Erazable Vellum Regma 91gr

Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
Mode 8 O O O
Mode 7 O
Mode 6 O O O O O O
Mode 5 O O
Mode 4
Mode 3
Mode 2
Mode 1

3. Film

Paper Azon Film 3mil Azon Film 4milRegma Film 3mil Regma Film 4mil Hoechst Film
4mil
Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
Mode 8
Mode 7
Mode 6
Mode 5
Mode 4 O O O O O O O O O
Mode 3 O O O O O O
Mode 2
Mode 1

FOR NON-LISTED PAPERS :

The following is the procedure to determine the best Fusing Temperature Setting for each type of pap
er.
The best setting is said to be the highest position before creasing begins to appear.

1. Set the Fusing Temperature Setting to the maximum mode for the type of paper, such as Plain
Paper, Vellum, or Film using SP #1, SP #2 or SP #3.

Plain Paper: Mode 7 (SP #1)

Vellum: Mode 8 (SP #2)
Film: Mode 5 (SP #3)

2. Make 3 white copies with the largest size of the paper available in the vertical grain direction. W
hite
copy is the worst case for creasing.

3. Check whether creasing appears on any of the copies.

4. If creasing appears, lower the Fusing Temperature Setting by 1 and repeat Steps # 2~4.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 011 09/27/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressure roller should be replaced.

MECHANICAL
1. Access SP mode with the steps below.
In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key, Clear/Stop key, press and hold the
Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds.

2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below.

ELECTRICAL
a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicator lights.
If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, pressFunction Select key until it lights.
b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to select Lamp Off Mode.)
c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights.
d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp Off Mode.)
e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode.

3. To prevent a paper misfeed, create a lead edge margin with the steps below.
a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights.

PAPER PATH
b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value) is indicated.

4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paper or thicker plain paper iw
th
vertical grain direction.

Note: Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting to the mode which is one step lower than
the proper setting for the particular kind of paper. For example, if the proper setting is Mode 3,
select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSB No. FW740-010 for more information regarding the
proper settings for particular types of paper and the adjustment procedure for non-listed papers.

FSM
5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately 5 times.

6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond with the scraped parts of the
pressure roller. If white lines and/or bands appear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a
new
one.

7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "Lamp Off Mode", "Lead Margin"
PARTS

and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to the original settings.

FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bull
etin
package contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:
OTHER

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow

• 4-38 Additional Information Pressure Roller Evaluation Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 012 10/15/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PHOTOINTERUPTOR
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The Photointeruptor shown below is missing from the Parts Catalog. This information should be added
to all

MECHANICAL
existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

ELECTRICAL
PAPER PATH
14
9

FSM
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW020024 Photointeruptor 1 15 14
PARTS
OTHER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 013 01/16/97

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. The following informatio
n

MECHANICAL
should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

• UPDATE NO. 1 - PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER - To prevent the Pressure Roller from being
damaged, the following modifications have been made.

1. The material of the Strippers has been changed from metal to a Teflon-coated resin to decrease the
friction level on the Pressure Roller.

ELECTRICAL
2. Springs have been added to press the Strippers against the Pressure Roller.

3. A Stopper Guide Plate has been added to prevent the Pressure Roller from contacting the Paper Exit
Cover when it is bent.

NOTE: The proper fusing temperature setting for each type of throughput material is very important to keep
the Fusing and Pressure Rollers in good condition for as long as possible. Please refer to Tech
Service Bulletin No. 010.
Please also refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. 011 regarding how to judge whether the Pressure
Roller is still usable or not. 40

31
43

42
41

FSM
PARTS

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OTHER

Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Continued...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 013
Page 2 of 2

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1634171 Pressure Roller Stripper 1→0 1 27 31
A1634175 Pressure Roller Stripper Ass’y 0→1 1 27 31
A1744155 Stopper Guide - Paper Exit 0→1 1 27 40*
AE044020 Pressure Roller Stripper 0 → 16 27 41*
AA066285 Stripper Spring 0 → 16 27 42*
A1634176 Stripper Stay Bracket 0→1 27 43*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3846060120 will have the new Pressure Roller
Strippers installed during production.

• UPDATE NO. 2 - ORIGINAL FEED TABLE ASSEMBLY - As per field request, the Original Feed
Table Assembly has been registered as a service part.

29

REFERENCE
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1636111 Original Feed Table - LT 1 9 29*
A1636113 Original Feed Table - A4 1 9 29*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*;KHN#g#NEH NLfFMfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *;KHN

‰ COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: T/S CORONA UNIT

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
A part number has been assigned to the T/S Corona Unit. This information should be incorporated into all

‰ MECHANICAL
existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

REFERENCE
NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1633849 T/S Corona Unit (EU) 1 25 *

‰ ELECTRICAL
A1633850 T/S Corona Unit (NA) 1 25 *

‰
‰
„
‰ FSMPAPER PATH
PARTS
OTHER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

      
        
   U KHNhNEINEfFKfNL
   U KHN

SUBJECT: BLANK COPIES

„
COPY QUALITY
for reproduction of additional bulletins.
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SYMPTOM:
Intermittent blank copies, partially blank copies or blank copies.

POSSIBLE CAUSES:
1. Arcing from Charge Corona.

‰
2. Arcing from the High Voltage Leads / Receptacles.

MECHANICAL
3. No voltage output from the C, G, B Power Pack.
4. Fuse 3 Open.

SOLUTION:
Inspect the following parts for proper operation and/or signs of arching. Replace the parts as necessary.

‰
ELECTRICAL
1. Relay Receptacle - Charge Corona (AD021113).
2. Charge Corona Receptacle (AD021114).
3. Charge Corona Assembly (A1632050).
4. Power Pack - C, G, B (AZ320079).
5. Power Supply (AZ230056).
6. Fuse 3 on Power Supply.

‰
NOTE: Inspect Grid Wire routing (see illustration below). Ensure that wire junctions are positioned as

PAPER PATH
shown and staggered. If the wires cross or touch each other, arcing or copy quality problems may occur.

‰
SM
„
PARTS
‰
OTHER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EJG#g#gNNE NHfFMfML
The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin
%440-'%&0)#13()0U Number issued for the A163 series.
####+)78)82)6#h#2f% Bulletin Cross Reference
####6-'3,#g#*;KHN Ricoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.
####7%:-2#h#2f% Gestetner N/A
Ricoh 015
Savin N/A

SUBJECT: SPRING REPLACEMENT – CHARGE CORONA UNIT

Note: This copy is intended as a master original

„
SYMPTOM:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
Difficulty when replacing Charge Corona Wires.

CAUSE:

The angle of the opening on the Spring is only 45°, and this makes it difficult to attach the spring. Also the
notch in the Right End Block made it difficult to attach the Spring from above.

SOLUTION:

The angle on the opening of the Spring has been changed from 45° to 90° so the Spring can be replaced
with less pulling. Also the length of the notch in the Right End Block has been changed from 4 mm to 2.9
mm so the spring end with a diameter of 3 mm can be hooked from above. See the Before and After figures
below.
B e fo r e A fte r

45° 90°

B e fo r e A fte r
4 .0 m m 2 .9 m m

GENERAL:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A163 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AA060124 AA060749 Spring 5 0 23 9
AD022336 AD022348 Right End Block- Charge 1 0 23 14

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. A163 – 001
Page 2 of 2

UNITS AFFECTED:

All copiers manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have new style parts installed during
production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Gestetner N/A N/A
Ricoh FW740 A3847050073
Savin N/A N/A

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:

0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or units
previously modified, use the new individual part numbers.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EJGg#NNF NIfEIfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#2f%
####6-'3,#h#*;KHN
####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: UPDATED ENERGY STAR REQUIREMENTS

Note: This copy is intended as a master original

„
GENERAL:

FIRMWARE
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

The following parts updates are being issued for all A163 Parts Catalog.

• UPDATE 1: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS – The Operating Instructions

have been changed to announce changes concerning
Energy Star (115V).

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1638637 A1638647 Operating Instructions– Energy Star 1 3 43 6
(115V)

• UPDATE 2: AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME – Auto Shut-Off Time has been

changed from “1 to 120 minutes” to “1 to 240 minutes”. The
change has been made to SP Mode 15. See Table below.

Mode No. Old Data New Data

15 Auto Shut-Off Time Setting (115 V) 1 to 120 Minutes 1 to 240 Minutes
(1 Minute per step) (1 Minute per step)
Default: 30 Minutes Default: 30 Minutes

REFERENCE
PART NO. DESCRIPTION OLD SUFFIX NEW SUFFIX QTY PAGE ITEM
A1635208 ROM No Suffix A 1 39 1
A1635230 Main Board A B 1 35 7

The Main Board ROM revision A (file name 740A1A.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services BBS.

NOTE: For more information about the Ricoh Technical Services BBS, order the Guide to Operation (P/N
BBS00001) through normal NSPC channels.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or units
previously modified, use the new individual part numbers.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES #'328630#23T#FLI

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EJG#g#NNG NKfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#2f%
####6-'3,#h#*;KHN
####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: SMALL CAP

Note: This copy is intended as a master original

„
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
GENERAL:
The part number for the Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252) was incorrect. The following part
correction is being issued for all A571 Parts Catalog Sections.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A5717479 A5717497 Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252) 1 3 19

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 296

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

         
   U EJGfFIEfFIFgNNH EEfEMfML
   U
   hf
  h KHNfKINfKJN
 hf

SUBJECT: INSTALLATION CHECK – GROUNDING WIRES

Note: This copy is intended as a master original

n
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PAPER PATH
SYMPTOM:
Paper jams at the Registration Roller.

CAUSE:
The ground wire is positioned behind the Main Board on the Roll Feeder.

NOTE: This can result in an electrical short.

nELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
Ensure that both Ground Wires are attached. (See Illustration Below)

NOTE-1: To ensure grounding,

tighten the screws for the
ground wires until the
spring washer’s [A] are
flattened

NOTE-2: Ensure that both wires Attach the Long Wire [C] to
are connected before the copier.
powering up the copier.

Attach the Short Wire [B] to

the stand.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 316

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 005 02/14/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – N/A
RICOH – FW740/750/760
SAVIN – N/A

SUBJECT: OVERTONING
Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOMS:

! PARTS
1. Background may appear on the copy.
2. The Used Toner Tank may fill up before the “Toner Overflow Indicator” begins to light.

CAUSE:
As developer deteriorates, the charge on the toner will gradually drop. This may cause excess toner to be

!
supplied to the Development Unit and cause the toner density to become too high.

COPY QUALITY
SOLUTION:
The software controlling the toner supply ratio has been changed.

In the new software, the TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio) has been changed as follows:

TS Level 0 1 2 3 4 5
Old No supply 7.5% 15% 30% 50% 100%

!
New No supply 7.5% 7.5% 7.5% 15% 100%

FIRMWARE
NOTE: The suffix of the ROM has been changed from A1635208A to A1635208B (FW740),
A2515228C to A2515228D (FW750), & A2525238C to A2525238D (FW760).

The Main PCB ROM revision “D” file name A251MA1D.EXE (FW750), file name A252MA1D.EXE (FW760)
and ROM Revision “B” file name A163ma1B.exe (FW740) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.

NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A251 and A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new firmware
installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Ricoh FW740 N/A
Ricoh FW750 A7829020131
Ricoh FW760 A7839020084

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 018WID

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 006 02/14/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – N/A
RICOH – FW760
SAVIN – N/A

! PARTS
SUBJECT: ORIGINAL JAM
Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
When feeding thick paper, the Original Feed Motor may lock up.

!
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
There is not enough torque for the Original Feed Motor when thick originals are being used.

SOLUTIONS:
To improve the machine performance, the follow countermeasure has been implemented.

! ELECTRICAL
1. The software has been modified to increase the torque of the Original Feed Motor.
NOTE: The part number A2525238 of the ROM is the same only the suffix has
changed from “C” to “D”.

2. The spring tension for the timing belt has been decreased.
NOTE: The part number of the spring has been changed from AA060541 to AA060824.

3. The bushing on the right side only, for both original drive roller (AF020451) are lubricated with Mobil
Temp 78 to decrease the friction load.

The PCB ROM revision “D” (file name A252MA1D.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.

NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new firmware installed
during production. All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial number listed will have the bushings
lubricated during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Ricoh FW760 A7839020084

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 018WID

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 007 11/20/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH – FW740/750/760
SAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

Note: This copy is intended as a master original

GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• 1-1 Updated Information (Specifications Page – STM)

• 1-1 Updated Information (Specifications Page – FSM)

 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO. 006WID

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 11/2000
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Table top

Overall Machine
Information
Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system
Original Feed: Sheet feed

⇒ Original Skew
Tolerance:
2 mm/400mm

Original Size: Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise
Copy Size: Same as "Original Size"
Copying Speed: 3 cpm (A1/D sideways)
First Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways)
Warm-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)
Multi-Copy: 1 to 1 only
Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set
to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum
Drum Charge: Single-wire with grid wires (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio: 1 : 1 (±0.5%)
Exposure System: Slit exposure via fiber optic array
Exposure Lamp: Fluorescent lamp (26 W)
Development: Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410,
2 bags)
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption: 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)
Development Bias: Negative
Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection by induction
sensor
Image Density Adjustment: Development bias control + exposure control
Paper Separation: Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls
Cleaning: Cleaning blade

A163 1-1 STM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rev. 11/2000
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Table top

Overall Machine
Information
Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system
Original Feed: Sheet feed
⇒ Original Skew 2 mm/400mm
Tolerance:

Original Size: Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise
Copy Size: Same as "Original Size"
Copying Speed: 3 cpm (A1/D sideways)
First Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways)
Warm-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)
Multi-Copy: 1 to 1 only
Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set
to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum
Drum Charge: Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio: 1 : 1 (±0.5%)
Exposure System: Slit exposure via fiber optic array
Exposure Lamp: Fluorescent lamp (26 W)
Development: Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2
bags)
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption: 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)
Development Bias: Negative
Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection by induction
sensor
Image Density Adjustment: Development bias control + exposure control
Paper Separation: Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls
Cleaning: Cleaning blade

FSM 1-1 A163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 008
008 03/19/2002
03/19/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760
SAVIN - NA
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

SUBJECT: POWER PACK (C.G.B.)

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
PARTS
GENERAL:
The Power Pack (C.G.B.) part number has been changed as shown below. In addition, the shape of the
Power Pack has been modified to facilitate factory assembly.

The following part correction is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

!
ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AZ320079 AZ320099 Power Pack – C.G.B 1 1 55 14

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style
Power Pack – C.G.B installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Gestetner NA
Ricoh FW740 Service parts only
Ricoh FW750 A7820010001
Ricoh FW760 A7830010032
Savin NA

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:

OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO 011WID

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 – 009 03/19/2002
03/19/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760
SAVIN - NA
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

SUBJECT: SPACER
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
PARTS
GENERAL:
Please add the following component, which was omitted from the Parts Catalog:
The following part addition is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

Item 44 Spacer AA132097

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AA132097 Spacer 1 19 44*
*DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO 011WID

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 – 011 11/05/2003

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – N/A
LANIER – N/A
RICOH – FW740/750/760
SAVIN – N/A

SUBJECT: LEFT AND RIGHT PAPER GUIDE

GENERAL:

„
PARTS
Two additional paper guides (pawls) have been added to the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit to further
ensure that the copy paper does not come into contact with the corona wire if a jam occurs in this area. This
addition effectively decreases the space between each pawl.

NOTE: When replacing with the modified parts for the first time, they must be installed together as a set.

The following part update is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. A163/A251/A252 – 011

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1633858 Left Paper Guide 2-0
1 25 1
B0473858 Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Left 0-2
A1633857 Right Paper Guide 2-0
1 25 2
B0473857 Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Right 0-2

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style
Guides installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Ricoh FW740 Service Parts Only
Ricoh FW750 Service Parts Only
Ricoh FW760 Service Parts Only

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Page 2 of 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %IKE#g#NNE NMfEEfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin
Number issued for the A571 series.
####+)78)82)6#h#2f% Bulletin Cross Reference
####6-'3,#h#6300#*))()6#(14#*;KHN Ricoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.
####7%:-2#h#2f% Gestetner NA
Ricoh 5000
Savin NA
SUBJECT: SMALL CAP
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

„
GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
The following part correction is being issued for the A571 Parts Section.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A5717479 A5717497 Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)(A251/A252) 1 3 19

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 304

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

         
   U LGJgNNE EEfNJfML
   U
   hf
  h(14 KJN
 hf

SUBJECT: REAR COPY TRAY

Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

n
GENERAL:

PARTS
The following parts updates are being issued for all A836 Parts Catalog Section.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A8364465 A86364469 Rear Copy Tray – Small (760S) 6 3 16
A8364468 Rear Copy Tray Sheet – Center 1→0 3 19
A1744493 Copy Tray Sheet 2→0 3 20

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 314

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 – 001 02/07/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER – NA
RICOH – FW770/FW780
SAVIN – NA

SUBJECT: ORIGINAL FEED RIGHT PLATE AND FIBER OPTICS

Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
GENERAL:

PARTS
The following parts corrections are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
INCORRECT CORRECT DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
PART NO. PART NO.
A1636061 B0476061 Original Feed Right Plate 1 9 23

Incorrect: Illustration and Part number Correct: Illustration and Part number

Index Part number Description Index Part number Description

12 A2521611 Fiber Optics (B048) 12 B0471640 Fiber Optics (B047)
25 B0471630 Fiber Optics (B047) 12 B0481640 Fiber Optics (B048)
25 B0481630 Fiber Optics (B048)

25

Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO 010WID

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 - 002 07/15/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH – FW770/FW780
SAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

Note: This copy is intended as a master original

GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

MANUAL
SERVICE
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒.

PAGES:

• 4-25 Jam Code Table (Updated Information).

Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 - 003 06/23/2003

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A040/A041
LANIER – LW110/LW111
RICOH – FW770/FW780
SAVIN – 7700W/7800W

SUBJECT: TONER HOPPER JOINT SHAFT

GENERAL:
To ensure that the gear (AB017378) does not break when the toner cartridge is installed without being
shaken, the Toner Hopper Joint Shaft has been changed as shown below.
The following parts updates are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

NOTE: Make sure developer does not get into the joint shaft unit assembly when the developer is
replaced. If developer gets into the joint part, disassemble the unit and clean it immediately.
If the developer were to remain in the assembly, it would cause joint operation problems due to
excessive mechanical load and parts wear.

Toner Supply Unit Plate

E - Ring
Seal – 22x52x0.5
Shaft Holder
Spring – 10N
Toner Supply
Clutch

Left Side Plate

Joint Shaft Unit –
Toner Hopper
Joint Shaft –
Toner Hopper

Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tech Service Bulletin No. B047/B048 – 003

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AD001036 AD001047 Development Unit 1-1 3/S 23 *
A1633147 Joint Shaft – Toner Hopper 1-0 X/X 23 23
B0473100 Joint Shaft Unit – Toner Hopper 0-1 3/S 23 23
B0103211 Seal – 22x52x0.5 0-1 3/S 23 37*
B0103212 Spring – 10N 0-1 3/S 23 38*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

NOTE: The new parts cannot be installed in the old Development Unit (#AD001036), as the left side plate
has been changed (which is not available as a service part).

UNITS AFFECTED:
All B047/B048 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style parts
installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

RICOH FW770
Gestetner A040
H8630400001
SAVIN 7700W
Lanier LW110
RICOH FW780
Gestetner A040
H8730400001
SAVIN 7800W
Lanier LW111

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Page 2 of 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 – 004 07/15/2003

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A040/A041
LANIER – LW110/LW111
RICOH – FW770/FW780
SAVIN – 7700W/7800W

SUBJECT: RECEIVING TRAY COVER

GENERAL:

„
The Receiving Tray Cover item 14 was incorrectly listed in the B047/B048 Parts Catalog. Please delete
Items 14 and 104 from the parts list and the illustration as shown below. The following parts corrections

PARTS
are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

Deleted: Item 14 & Item 104

Deleted: Items 104

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0471331 - Receiving Tray Cover 1→0 - 7 12
04340082B - Tapping Screw – M4x8 n-3 - 7 104

Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 – 005 03/11/2004

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A040/A041
LANIER – LW110/LW111
RICOH – FW770/FW780
SAVIN – 7700W/7800W

SUBJECT: FAN MOTOR HARNESS

„
PARTS
GENERAL:

The following part update is being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
PART NO. CORRECT DESCRIPTION INCORRECT DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1744203 SEAL:FAN:HARNESS FAN MOTOR HARNESS 1 17 18

Copyright  2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine